The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutResolution - 2002-R0373 - Contract For Health Department Renovations. - 09_17_2002Resolution No. 2002-RO373 September 17, 2002 Item No. 47 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, a Contract for the City of Lubbock Health Department interior renovations, by and between the City of Lubbock and Minnix Commercial of Lubbock, Texas and related documents. Said Contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council. Passed by the City Council this 17th day of September , 2002. UGAL, MAYOR ATTEST: Rebecca Garza, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: . LIA A- "A A I A Victor Kilma , Purchasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: William de Haas Contract Manager/Attorney gs: /ccdocs/Contract-LubbHealthDept. res September 4, 2002 No Text 0 ITB #162-02/RS, Addendum #5 City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13TH STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 FAX: (806)775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us ADDENDUM #5 ITB #162-02/RS City of Lubbock Health Department Interior Renovations ^� MAILED TO VENDOR: August 23, 2002 CLOSE DATE: August 28, 2002 @ 2:00 P.M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please find attached Addendum #5 from Parkhill, Smith and Cooper. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock .� P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to : (806)775-2164 �— or Email to: Rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK i �RAll 4nSieId Senior Buyer �,,, 162-02Add5.doc 0 ARC tiQ • Nooti �j► VA WV% s tu.tuov.■.■■. u■ uu■■uuuur■■■ OHN HHHUH uuuuuu■uu■ r v ■I i II " l_J■ 1. I■ !w fill .I ... .t L■■■ 4 746 �. ■i .■■r-. t Il I■ a :::: IF ;. It AO■. ..■■■.-.:■■--■■. 0 t >_ $-Z3-Lcxs2 ADDENDUM NO.5 TO: All Prospective Bidders / Plan Holders PROJECT: City of Lubbock Health Department Interior Renovation DATE: August 23, 2002 PSC Job No: 03-8794-00 0 Attention of all Prospective Bidders/Plan Holders is directed to the following modifications to the referenced Plans and Project Manual. This Addendum forms a part of, and shall be attached to the Contract Documents, and modifies the original Bidding Documents dated 6/28/02 as noted below: This Addendum consists of 1 page(s), plus 0 attachments. , DRAWINGS: SHEET E-106 1. Replace lighting fixture schedule note 'A' with the following: "Furnish fixture 'A' with dimming ballast equal to Lutron #FDB-T432-120-2-S." 2. Replace electrical legend note 1 with the following: "Dimmer control shall be equal to Lutron ##MA-600-WH wallpack with power pack HP-2. Provide conduit and conductors as required." END OF ADDENDUM NO. 5 ■■` PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners 4222 85" Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423 (806) 473-2200 FAX (806) 473-3500 "" Lubbock ElPaso Midland Amarillo ITB #162-02/RS, Addendum #4 P" City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13TH STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 FAX: (806)775-2164 http://purchas i ng.ci.l ubbock.tx.us ADDENDUM #4 ITB #162-02/RS City of Lubbock Health Department Interior Renovations MAILED TO VENDOR: August 21, 2002 CLOSE DATE: August 28, 2002 @ 2:00 P.M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please find attached Addendum #4 from Parkhill, Smith and Cooper. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P, P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to : (806)775-2164 or Email to: Rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBB CK Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer om 162-02Add4.doc r 0 ADDENDUM NO.4 TO: All Prospective Bidders / Plan Holders PROJECT: City of Lubbock Health Department Interior Renovation DATE: August 21, 2002 PSC Job No: 03-8794-00 Attention of all Prospective Bidders/Plan Holders is directed to the following modifications to the referenced Plans and Project Manual. This Addendum forms a part of, and shall be attached to the Contract Documents, and modifies the original Bidding Documents dated 6/28/02 as noted below: This Addendum consists of 1 page(s), plus 0 attachments. DRAWINGS: .� SHEET E-102 1. Replace note #7 with the following: "Existing Panel 'D' to be replaced and relocated. Existing feeder shall be replaced (see note #5 on Sheet E-104). Extend existing 12- 120V/20A circuits to new location." Provide, splice box above ceiling as required. 2. Replace note #9 with the following: "Existing Panel 'E' to be replaced and relocated. Extend existing feeder and conduit, existing 40-120V/20A circuits, and existing 1- 208V/30A circuit to new location." Provide splice box above ceiling as required. r■, SHEET E-104 1. Replace note #5 with the following: " Location of new surface mounted Panel 'D'. Panel shall be 100A MLO, 120/208V, 3 ph., 42 circuits, and match the short circuit .rating of existing panel 'D'. Panel shall be fed with 441 & #4 GND in 2" C from Panel 'DP'. Circuits 1-27 shall have 20A/1P breakers and spaces 28-42 shall be labeled as 'SPACED ONLY. Circuits 1-12 shall feed loads from previous Panel 'D'." 2. Replace note #10 with the following: "Location of new surface mounted Panel 'E'. Panel shall be 225A MLO, 120/208V, 3ph., 42 circuits, and match the short circuit rating of existing panel 'E'. Extend all existing conductors and conduit to new location. Circuits 1-32, 34, 37, 39-42 shall have 20A/1P breakers, circuits 33 and 35 shall have 30A/2P breakers and circuits 36 and 38 shall have a 20A/2P breaker. Directory for new panel 'E' shall match existing directory from previous panel 'E'. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 4 PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners 4222 85" Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423 (806) 473-2200 FAX (806) 473-3500 �` Lubbock ElPaso Midland Amarillo ITEI #162-02/RS, Addendum #3 City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT +*+ ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13TM STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 FAX: (806)775-2164 httpJ/purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us ADDENDUM#3 ITB #162-02/RS City of Lubbock Health Department Interior Renovations MAILED TO VENDOR: August 19, 2002 CLOSE DATE: August 28, 2002 @ 2:00 P.M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please find attached Addendum #3 from Parkhill, Smith and Cooper. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to : (806)775-2164 or Email to: Rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, s.. CITY OF LUBBOCK PM Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer ow 162-02Add3.doc 9,0 Apt,y rt}L3jl o■uu■■ou■■u■ � /'� woou■wuo■ou mom000wn■ � uruu■wou■ou 11 'In. ■uououuu■o w1 ■ 11 ■-J. 11LAS 1■ ■I I■_ \. I■■■■ ■■Y ■I .rwr-♦ .1 ...1 . . 1,14746 0. OF I ADDENDUM NO.3 TO: All Prospective Bidders / Plan Holders PROJECT: City of Lubbock Health Department Interior Renovation DATE: August 19, 2002 PSC Job No: 03-8794-00 Attention of all Prospective Bidders/Plan Holders is directed to the following modifications to the referenced Plans and Project Manual. This Addendum forms a part of, and shall be attached to the Contract Documents, and modifies the original Bidding Documents dated 6/28/02 as noted below: This Addendum consists of 1 page(s), plus 2 attachments. SPECIFICATIONS: DRAWINGS: SHEET A-201 1. ELEVATION D4, change the far left glass cut-out to a sliding glass opening with a recessed bottom track; refer to attached drawing AD3-01. Glazing type will remain as specified. 2. ELEVATION A3, change the far left glass cut out to a sliding glass opening with a recessed bottom track, refer to attached drawing AD3-02. Glazing type will remain as specified. CLARIFICATIONS: END OF ADDENDUM NO. 3 r■• - PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. - Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners 4222 85" Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423 (806) 473-2200 ■ FAX (806) 473-3500 pw. Lubbock ElPaso Midland Amarillo r5"43 0 0 CL Qi a 3 CD cn CT CD Q o oo T 0 T x �u 0 CD 2 x o 0 o < o s (D (D 3' C -o x cn � C En CDo o .. o N o O D I- (14 c c Lo w 60 �I c o cn O �p O N O O N 0 N 7Z 0 ELEVATION 3/8"=1'=D" I 2 1/2" MTL STUDS W/ 5/8" GWB EA SIDE ALIGN W/ EXISTING ABOVE GLASS DIVIDER PLAM COUNTER TOP CUT INTO EXISTING COUNTER 0 D Z C- 0y d 7 CD ' (p � c C �p ,y. C CT O 2. CT 0 0 0 0 -4 - 0 cD --4 0 CCDD 2 0 M D CD 0 D < m < o CD rt_ C � � CD a 3 CD FIT cn Cn CD [/1 S (D CD rt 0' 0 7 p n .. CD D o ao I i o -Q O (p O - N 0 C) N ELEVATION 3/8" =1'-O" - 2 1/2" MTL STUDS W/ 5/8" GWB EA SIDE. ALIGN W/ PARTITION ABOVE - OFFSET GLASS DIVIDERS EXISTING COUNTER TO REMAIN ITB #162-02/RS, Addendum #2 City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13"" STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 FAX: (806)775-2164 ..� http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us ADDENDUM #2 ITB #162-02/RS City of Lubbock Health Department Interior Renovations MAILED TO VENDOR: August 12, 2002 CLOSE DATE: August 28, 2002 2:00 P.M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above.named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please find attached Addendum #2 from Parkhill, Smith and Cooper. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 r Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to: (806)775-2164 or Email to: Rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer ,, 162-02Add2.doc .................. uut/ottpuuu ouourrrruuu ■t/trrrrtrrr■t■■r■ ouruuuuuu■ Z II --J.W i. IN tl An. \• Itt aw /I ntr-► + It IN It tI un � • iti■ iiNCHOtWNSCHN g'-ZC�Z ADDENDUM N0.2 TO: All Prospective Bidders / Plan Holders PROJECT: City of Lubbock Health Department Interior Renovation . DATE: August 8, 2002 PSC Job No: 03-8794-00 Attention of all Prospective Bidders/Plan Holders is directed to the following modifications to the referenced Plans and Project Manual. This Addendum forms a part of, and shall be attached to the Contract Documents, and modifies the original Bidding Documents dated 6/28/02 as noted below: This Addendum consists of 2 page(s), plus 6 attachments. SPECIFICATIONS: Section 08000 DOOR SCHEDULE 1. Add the following door to the schedule. 1 I I l A 3-OX4-2 C STL STL L I 2. Add attached drawing SD2-06 showing the door types A-C as referenced on the door schedule. Section 09915 COLOR SCHEDULE 1. On the FINISH SCHEDULE, change the wall designations for room 202 to by W3 for all walls. DRAWINGS: SHEET C-101 1. On the site plan, change the note on the far east striped access aisle from "4" to "5". SHEET A-101 Ism PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. Engineers r Architects ■ Planners 4222 851" Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423 (806) 473-2200 a FAX (806) 473-3500 Lubbock ElPaso Midland Amarillo 1. Add DEMOLITION NOTE "6" to the rooms shown on the attached drawings AD2-01 and AD2-02. 2. Change DEMOLITION NOTE "14" to "30" where shown on attached drawing AD2-03 on the second floor DEMOLITION PLAN. 3. Change DEMOLITION NOTE 20 to read as follows: " RUBBER BASE" SHEET A-102 1. Change the floor section "A4/A201" to "A4/A202" where indicated on the attached drawing AD2-04. 2. Add door key "111A" to the coiling OH counter door indicated on the attached drawing AD2-05. 3. In drawing A5, rooms MEN 145 and WOMEN 146, change the keyed note 3 to 24; and keyed note 4 to 23. SHEET A-201 1. ELEVATION D4, change the glass cut-out detail reference to A3/A501. CLARIFICATIONS: SHEET A-101 1. There is no ceiling demolition occurring in rooms 117 and 139 as there is currently no ceiling in these spaces. SHEET A-102 1. The keyed notes 23 and 24 refer to the water resistant gypsum board in the toilet rooms, however, there is an additional FR panel which is installed over this GWB as ., noted in the finish schedule. All finished wall surfaces in rooms 130, 131, 145 and 146 shall be FRP 2. In room 202, all finished wall surfaces shall be FRP. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 2 PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. Engineers • Architects ■ Planners 4222 85" Street • Lubbock, Texas 79423 (806) 473-2200 FAX (806) 473-3500 Lubbock ElPaso Midland Amarillo 0 r P- PARTIAL DEMOLITION PLAN FIRST FLOOR 1/8"_1,-a„ .................. •■•■■■■■ ...... .... ..............oman Project Name: Lubbock Health Department Sheet: AD2-01 ......:FENNO■••'■•••'••' Interior Renovation - Issue Date: August 8, 2002 ■'i �• ' '• . i�. ■11 ii ■n. Project Address: 1902 Texas Avenue Revisions: 1 IMMOM " - " `. ""' ■1 ..-. . �.•�. Lubbock, Texas 01 ■M.■ ;. . 1- 1■ G1 Mam, ' :. :. PSC Project #: 03.8794.00 ..........:....:.. .................. PIM A., �1------_----11 �I 7 I U PARTIAL DEM0LIT10N �Pl�Nl �R�1�1OOR 1 'm" Project Name: ■ on AD2-02 Lubbock Health .Department Sheet: rru rm'r an Interior Renovation Issue Date: August 8, 2002 i "1■ Project Address: 1902 Texos . Avenue Revisions: 0 no 8.06 Lubbock, Texas o m�C� memo PSC Project #:03.8794.00 ZZ r ww AM III A IAA! A PAR P" P- n II 3 II 11 II II 11 11 11 II 11 11 II II II 11 it II II II 11 II 11 11 II II it I 11 II it II 11 11 II 4 �T 11 11 11 PARTIAL DEMOLITION PLAN SECOND FLOOR 1/8"=1'-0" Project Name: Lubbock Health Department Sheet: AD2-03 Interior Renovation Issue Date: August 8, 2002 Project Address: 1902 Texas Avenue Revisions: Lubbock, Texas PSC Project #:03.8794.00 C3/A301 .*400 15 WAS01 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN FIRST FLOOR '••••■■■'•HIM Project Name: Lubbock Health Department Sheet: AD2-04 ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ Interior Renovation Issue Date: August 8, 2002 In, " 'V " Project Address: 1902 Texas Avenue Revisions: •` `• MOU Lubbock, Texas :20:1,11 All, PSC Project #: 03.8794.00 M�� MEN II I HALL 130 L 129 cc f 24 3 3 HALL 15 125 m '^ 2 C5/A501 D5/A501 ,A■ 107 t 5/8 r 18 104A I I o /8 —1 7/8" 6'-9 316' B5/A501 I i VAULT OFFICE/EXAM 106' �. �— �� VAULT VITAL 107 B4/A301 SIM 1 55 STATS C1/A201 SIM. 104 *%00 C5/A501 10461I N SIM. A3/A301 104C I I C o 110 108 m FILES 111 N ' 111 REC PT o 3 111A 10 j HALL 3 123 - _ OFFICE LOBBY 9�0� 102 112 n .,, PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN FIRST FLOOR . ....... r.......■... r++rr■+++r+r■.r■r. ■r■■rr+++r■ UMSH Project Name: Lubbock Health Department Sheet: AD2-05 ■+■+r■rr+rrrr+■■rr ■rr+r+r+'r"'rr"' Interior Renovation Issue Date: August 8, 2002 ■ruu■+u++u■rr■ n •+• •rr •u 1; ;rr■: Project Address: 1902 Texas Avenue Revisions:. ■n ■. v+ u Lubbock, Texas •' 0=01, 11 AL " A: PSC Project #:03.8794.00 ■+++r■+■+r:■■ N: ■r■+rrr+r■++■rrrr■ c 4 AS SCHED 0 SCWD DOOR AS SCHED AS SCHED 0 U O N 2 Q U f1'1 C2 it M 'v- r7 B 0 SCWD DUTCH DOOR COILING OH COUNTER DOOR Project Name: Lubbock Health Department Sheet: AD2-06 Interior Renovation Issue Date: August 8, 2002 Project Address: 1902 Texas Avenue Revisions:. Lubbock, Texas PSC Project #:03.8794.00 `w ITB #162-02/RS, Addendum #1 City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ADDENDUM #1 ROOM 3T11 STREET ICIPAL BUILDING ITB #1 62-02/RS LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 City of Lubbock Health Department Interior PH: (806)775-2167 FAX: (806)775-2164 Renovations httpJ/purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us MAILED TO VENDOR: August 7, 2002 CLOSE DATE: August 28, 2002 a 2:00 P.M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above.named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please find attached Addendum #1 from Parkhill, Smith and Cooper. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 �.. Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to : (806)775-2164 or Email to: Rshuffield®mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK 4 Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer ,,,�„ 162-02Add1.doc an ADDENDUM NO-1 TO: All Prospective Bidders / Plan Holders -- PROJECT: City of Lubbock Health Department Interior Renovation DATE: August 7, 2002 PSC Job No: 03-8794-00 P- Anemion of all Prospective Bidders/Plan Holden is directed to the following modifications to the referenced Plans and Project Manual. This Addendum forms a part of, and shall be anachcd to the Coruract Docuuwins, and modifies the original Bidding Documents dated 6/29/02. as noted below: This Addendum consists of 2 page(s), plus 3 attachments. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 SPECIFICATIONS: Section 08000 DOOR SCHEDULE 1. Under Section 2.3. DELETE paragraph B in its entirety. 2. Under PART 3 - EXECUTION, ADD the following: "3.1 DOOR SCHEDULE - See attached." 3. Under PART 3 - EXECUTION, INSERT the attached DOOR SCHEDULE Section 08700 HARDWARE """ 1_ Under Section 3.3. DELETE the sentence "See attached." 2. Under Section 3.3, ADD the attached HARDWARE SCHEDULE PSection 09915 COLOR SCHEDULE 1. Under Section 2.3, CHANGE Remark number R4 to R6, and R5 to R7, and add the following new remarks: "R4 Patch VCT where removed for new walls" "R5 Patch base to match existing; patch from corner to corner" 2. Under PART 3 - EXECUTION, ADD the following: "3.1 FINISH SCHEDULE" ,.. PAwkrau., SMm+ & coom, INC. Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners 4222 851" Street • Lubbock. Texas 79423 18061 473-2200 FAX (806) 473-3500 ,.. Lubbock ElPaso Midland Amarillo 3. Under PART 3 - EXECUTION, INSERT the anached FINISH SCHEDULE. DRAWINGS: None CLARIFICATIONS: None PARI(MU, SMiTM & COOPER, INC, Engineers m Archizecis ■ Planners 4222 85'" SIrear ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423 (806) 473-2200 FAX 1806) 473-3500 LubnocK El Paso Midlana Amarillo I I I I 1 I I I Heailh Depa"N Renovation City of Lubbock DOOR SCHEDULE DOD[ Fit Mark PR Sue Frame Details Type Const Consl Size Head Jamb Sill Remarks 1 04A 3.0x4.2 C STL STL L1 1 04B 3.Ox4.2 STL STL I L1 1 04C 3-Ox4-2 C STL STL L1 1 06 HM 7 314 R1 1 07 3.Ox7-Ox1-314 A SCWD HM 5 7/8 L 1 1 08 3.00-00-3/4 A SCWD I HM 16718 L1 1 09 3.0x7-00-3/4 A SCWD HM 15718 L1 1 10 3.00-00-3/4 A SCWD HM 5 7/8 11 1 11 3-0x7.Ox11.314 6 SCWD X R2 1 29 • 3.012.W-Oxt-314 A SCWD HM 57/8 L3,R3 1 32 3.Ox7-OXI-314 A SCWD HM 57/8 1 33 3-Ox7-00-3/4 A SCWD HM 5 718 1 1 34 3.0x7-0x1-3/4 A SCWD HM 5718 1 35 3.Ox7.Ox1-3/4 A SCWD HM 5 7/8 1 35 X X 1 38 6.1x4-5 C 5TL STL L1,R4 1 40 3-Dx7-00-3/4 A SCWD HM 57/8 L 1 1 41 3-Ox7-0xl-3/4 A SCWD HM 57/8 L1 1 144 3.00-00-3/4 A SCWD HM 57/8 1 45 • 3-0/1-00-Ox1-3/4 A SCWD HM 7114 L1 ' 1 48 3.Ox7-Ox1-3/4 A SCWD HM 115/8 L3 2 02 3.W-W-3/4 A SCWD HM 57/8 L 1 2 04 3.Ox7-Ox1-3/4 A SCWD HM 5718 11 Z 05 3.00-Ox1.3/4 A SCWD HM 5 718 L1 2 108 3.00-Ox1-314 A SCWD HM 6718 L1 2 07 3.Ox7-Ox1.3/4 A SCWD HM 5 718 L1 2 08 3.Ox7-Ox1.314 A SCWD HM 5716 L1 2 09 3.00-0x1-3/4 A SCWD HM 57/8 11 2 10 3.Ox7-Oxl-3/4 A SCWD HM 57/8 L1 2 11 3.Ox7.Ox 1-314 A SCWD HM 5 718 L 1 2 12 3-00-Ox1.3/4 A SCWD HM 57/8 L1 2 13 &Ox7-DA-3/4 A SCWD HM 5 718 L1 2 14 3.0x7-Oxl-3/4 A SCWD HM 67/8 L1 2 15 3-W-00-3/4 A SCWD I HM 15718 1 L 1 2 16 3.W-00-3/4 A SCWD HM 5 718 Li 2 123 1 3-00-51-3/4 A SCWD HM I 57/8 is L1 I I - I .-. I 0387940D DDOR SCHEDULE OBODD-3 r� r, a-" 0- HARDWARE SCHE13ULE HW--1 OPENING NO's 107, 108, 136, 204, 205, 205, 207, 208, 209, 210, 211, 212, 213 EACH OPENING TO HAVE: 3 EA HAGER BUTTS BB1279 4-1/2X4-1/2 1 EA SCHLAGE LOCK D50RD 04-039 RHO 1 EA LCN CLOSER 4111 EDA X SNB 1 EA HAGER WALL STOP 236W 3 EA HAGER SILENCER 307D HW-2 OPENING NO's 109,202 EACH OPENGN TO HAVE. 4 EA HAGER BUTTS 8131279 4-V2 X 4-1/2 1 EA SCHLAGE LOCK D40S RHO 1 EA LCN CLOSER 4111 F-OA X SNB 1 EA HAGER WALL STOP 236W 3 EA HAGER PERIMETER GASKETING 736W HW 3 OPENING NO's 110, 141.215, 216 EACH OPENING TO HAVE: 4 EA HAGER BUTTS BB1279 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 1 EA SCHLAGE LOCK 080RD 04-039 RHO 1 EA LCN CLOSER 4111 EDA X SNB 1 EA HAGER WALL STOP 236W 4 EA HAGER SILENCER 307D HW-4 OPENING NO's 111 EACH OPENGN TO HAVE 4 EA HAGER BUTTS 881279 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 1 EA SCHLAGE LOCK ❑66RD 04.039 RHO 1 EA HAGER SURFACE BOLT (TOP LEAF) 279D 1 EA LCN CLOSER 4111 EDA X SNB 1 EA HAGER WALL STOP 236W 3 EA HAGER SILENCER 307D HW 5 OPENING NO's 132, 133,134, 140 EACH OPENING TO HAVE: 3 EA HAGER BUTTS BB1279 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 1 EA SCHLAGE LOCK D50RD 04-039 RHO 1 EA HAGER WALL STOP 236W 626 626 630 626 BLACK 626 626 630 626 BLACK 625 626 630 626 BLACK 626 626 US26D 630 626 BLACK 626 626 626 p" am 3 EA HAGER SILENCER 307D BLACK HW-6 OPENING NO'S 135 EACH OPENGIN TO HAVE: •* 4 EA HAGER BUTTS 881279 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 626 1 EA SCHLAGE LOCK 056RD 04-039 RHO 626 1 EA HAGER WALL STOP 236W 626 3 EA HAGER SILENCER 3070 BLACK Hw 7 .- OPENING NO'S 144 EACH OPENING TO HAVE: 3 EA HAGER BUTTS 881191 4-1/2 X 4-112 626 1 EA VON DUPRIN EXIT DEVICE 9875EO-F 575 US26D 1 EA LCN CLOSER 4111 EDA X SN8 630 1 EA HAGER FLOOR STOP 267F US260 1 EA HAGER WEATHERSTRIPPING 307D BLACK 1 EA HAGER DOOR BOTTOM SWEEP 777S AL 1 EA HAGER THRESHOLD 412S AL HW-B OPENING NO's 129 ., EACH OPENGNN TO HAVE. 4 EA HAGER BUTTS BB1279 4-1/2 X4-1/2 626 2 EA VON DUPRIN VERT ROD EXIT DEVICE 9847L-F 3381304L 3215 US26D 1 EA HAGER ASTRAGAL 837S AL 2 EA LCN CLOSER 4111 EDA X SNB , 630 2 EA HAGER WALL STOP 236W 626 ..a 4 EA HAGER SILENCER 307D BLACK HWr9 OPENING NO'S 145 EACH OPENING TO HAVE 6 EA HAGER BUTTS 881279 4-112 X 4-1/2 626 1 EA SCHLAGE LOCK DBORD 04-039 RHO 626 2 EA HAGER FLUSH BOLTS (INACTIVE LEAF) 281D US26D 2 EA HAGER FLOOR STOP 267F US26D 4 EA HAGER SILENCER 307D BLACK ow HW 10 OPENING NO's 148 EACH OPENING TO HAVE: 3 EA HAGER BUTTS 1 EA VON DUPRIN EXIT DEVICE 1 EA LCN CLOSER 2 EA HAGER WALL STOP 4 EA HAGER SILENCER 681279 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 626 9875L-F US26D 4111 EDAX SNB 630 236W 626 307D BLACK Health Departmenl Renovation City of Lubbock FINISH SCHEDULE Room Walls Ceilings Miscellaneous Colors ND Description Floor Base N E S W Type HI (N-In) Remarks Door Frame Millwork i 108 NOT USED 109 TOILE( F1 02 W3 W3 W3 W3 C1 8'-0" P1 P2 110 STORAGE F 1 62 W1 W1 W1 W1 C1 8'-9" P1 P2 111 FILES F1 B2 W1 W1 C3 R1. R4, R5 Pt P2 P3 112 OFFICE 113 OFFICE 114 NURSE 115 OFFICE 116 OFFICE 117 STORAGE F1 B2 W4 W4 W1 W1 C1 8'-0" P1 P2 118 OFFICE B2 W1 W1 W1 Wi C1 8'-0" R1, R5 119 OFFICE B2 W1 W1 W1 W1 Cl V.V. R1, R5 120 OFFICE 62 W1 W1 W1 W1 Cl 8'-0" R1, R5 121 OFFICE F1 B2 W1 W1 W1 W1 C1 8'-0" R1, R4, R5 122 OFFICE F1 B2 W1 W1 W1 W1 C1 8=0" R1, R4, R5 123 1 HALL F1 B2 I W1 C3 R1, R4, R5 0367940D FINISH SCHEDULE M16-3 Heallh Deparimeni Renovation Cily of Lubbock FINISH SCHEDULE Room Walls Ceilings Miscellaneous Colors No Descnpllon Floor Base N E S W Type HI (fl!-in) Remarks Door Frame Millwork 148 HALL F1 62 W1 W1 W1 W1 C1 R2 201 RECEPTION F3 81 W1 W1 W1 Wt C1 8'-0" 202 TOILET F3 81 W3 W1 W1 W1 C1 8'-0" R3 P7 P8 203 WORK F3 81 W1 W1 W1 W1 C1 W-0" R3, R7 P8 P4, P5 204 OFFICE F3 131 W1 W1 W1 W1 C1 aw, P7 P8 205 OFFICE F3 61 W1 Wt W1 W1 C1 81-0" P7 P8 206 OFFICE F3 81 W1 W1 W1 W1 C1 W.0" R3 P7 PB 207 OFFICE F3 81 Wt W1 W1 W1 C1 8'-0" P7 P8 208 OFFICE F3 81 W1 W1 W1 W1 C1 W--0" R3 P7 Pe 209 OFFICE F3 181 1 W1 W1 W1 Wt C1 8-0" P7 P8 210 OFFICE F3 I 84 fwl W1 I W1 W1 C1 f W-0" R3 P7 PB 211 OFFICE F3 B1 W1 W1 W1 W1 C1 8'-0" P7 P8 212 OFFICE F3 81 Wt W1 W1 W1 C1 181.011 R7 P7 I P8 11 03870400 FINISH SCHEDULE 09915.3 CITY OF LUBBOCK INVITATION TO BID FOR TITLE: CITY OF LUBBOCK HEALTH DEPARTMENT INTERIOR RENOVATIONS ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS ITB NUMBER: 162-02/RS PROJECT NUMBER:. 9150.9211.30000 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT INDEX 1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS 2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3. BID SUBMITTAL — BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS ei 4. PAYMENT BOND r'. 5. PERFORMANCE BOND 6, CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 7. CONTRACT 8. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT r4 9. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS 10. SPECIFICATIONS P 4�F1+ r�, NOTICE TO BIDDERS e" f NOTICE TO BIDDERS ITB #162-02/RS Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 28th day of August, 2002, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: "CITY OF LUBBOCK HEALTH DEPARTMENT INTERIOR RENOVATIONS" After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to ensure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, before the expiration of the date above first written. Bids are due at 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 28th day of August, 2002, and the City of Lubbock City Council will consider the bids on the 12th day of September, 2002, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him. It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a non -mandatory pre -bid conference on 14th day of August, 2002 at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in the Planning Conference Room 107, Lubbock, Texas. Bidders may view the plans and specifications without charge at Lubbock City Hall, 1625 131h Street, Lubbock, Texas, Purchasing Department, Room L-04. Plans and specifications may be obtained by the bidder for a $100.00 refundable deposit per set. Plans and specifications may be obtained from Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, 4222 85th Street, Lubbock, Texas 79423, Phone: (806) 473-2200. Plans and specifications will be shipped at the bidder's expense. If bidder requires overnight or second day expedited method parcel shipment, the bidder will incur shipping charges and must furnish the name of the service to be used and the bidder's account number. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at (806) 775- 2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. CITY OF LUBBOCK VICTOR KILMAN �r PURCHASING MANAGER No Text GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS „a 1 BID DELIVERY, TIME & DATE 1.1 The City of Lubbock is seeking written and sealed competitive bids to furnish CITY OF LUBBOCK HEALTH DEPARTMENT INTERIOR RENOVATIONS per the attached specifications and contract documents. Sealed bids will be received no later than 2:00 p.m. CST, the 28th day of August, 2002 at the office listed below. Any bid received after the date and hour specified will be rejected and returned unopened to the bidder. Each bid and supporting documentation must be in a sealed envelope or container plainly labeled in the lower left-hand corner: "ITB #162-02/RS, CITY OF LUBBOCK HEALTH DEPARTMENT INTERIOR RENOVATIONS" and the bid opening date and time. Bidders must also include their company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. Bids must be addressed to: Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager City of Lubbock 1625 13th Street, Room L-04 Lubbock, Texas 79401 1.2 Bidders are responsible for making certain bids are delivered to the Purchasing Department. Mailing of a bid does not ensure that the bid will be delivered on time or delivered at all. If bidder does not hand deliver bid, we suggest that he/she use some sort of delivery service that provides a receipt. 1.3 Bids will be accepted in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by private courier service. No bids will be accepted by oral communication, telephone, electronic mail, telegraphic transmission, or telefacsimile transmission. THE CITY WILL NOT ACCEPT FAX BIDS. 1.4 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to postpone the date and time for opening bids through an addendum. 2 PRE -BID MEETING 2.1 For the purpose of familiarizing bidders with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing addenda as needed for the clarification of the Invitation to Bid (ITB) documents, a non -mandatory pre -bid meeting will be held at 10:00 a.m., August 14th, 2002 in Planning Conference Room 107, Lubbock, Texas. All persons attending the meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective bidder they represent. 2.2 It is the bidder's responsibility to attend the pre -bid meeting though the meeting is not mandatory. The City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre -bid meeting to bidders who do not attend the pre -bid meeting. 3 ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS 3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the ITB are made by written bid addenda. 3.2 Any bidder in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents may request an interpretation thereof from the Purchasing Department. At the request of the bidder, or in the event the Purchasing Department deems the interpretation to be substantive, the interpretation will be made by written addendum issued by the Purchasing Department. Such addendum issued by the Purchasing Department will be sent to all bidders receiving the original Invitation to Bid (ITB) and will become part of the bid package having the same binding effect as provisions of the original bid. NO VERBAL EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request for interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department no later than five (5) days before the bid closing date. 3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of Lubbock ' shall not be legally bound by any amendment or interpretation that is not in writing. Only information supplied by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department in writing or in this ITB should be used in preparing bid responses. All contacts that a bidder may have had before or after receipt of this ITB with any individuals, employees, or representatives of the City and any information that may have been read in any news media or seen or heard in any communication facility regarding this bid should be disregarded in preparing responses. F; 3.4 The City does not assume responsibility for the receipt of any addendum sent to bidders. 4 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS 4.1 Each bidder shall carefully examine all ITB documents and thoroughly familiarize itself with all requirements before submitting a bid to ensure that their bid meets the intent of these specifications. 4.2 Before submitting a bid, each bidder shall be responsible for making all investigations and examinations that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the requirements of this Invitation to Bid. Failure to make such investigations and examinations shall not relieve the bidder from obligation to comply, in every detail, with all provisions and requirements of the Invitation to Bid. 4.3 Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Purchasing Manager and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Purchasing Manager prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the bidder fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If bidder does not notify Purchasing Manager before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. AA 5 BID PREPARATION COSTS 5.1 Issuance of this ITB does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred in the preparation and submission of a bid. 5.2 The issuance of this ITB does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any services or equipment. 5.3 All costs related to the preparation and submission of a bid shall be paid by the bidder. 6 TRADE SECRETS CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND THE TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT 6.1 If you consider any portion of your bid to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial decision, including trade secrets and commercial or financial information, clearly identify those portions. 6.2 The City of Lubbock will honor your notations of trade secrets and confidential information and decline to release such information initially, but please note that the final determination of whether a particular portion of your bid is in fact a trade secret or commercial or financial information that may be withheld from public inspection will be made by the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction. In the event a public information request is received for a portion of your bid that you have marked as being confidential information, you will be notified of such request and you will be required to justify your legal position in writing to the Texas Attorney General pursuant to Section 552.305 of the Government Code. In the event that it is determined by opinion or order of the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction that such information is in fact not privileged and confidential under Section 552.110 of the Government Code and Section 252.049 of the Local Government Code, then such information will be made available to the requester. 6.3 Marking your entire bid CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY is not in conformance with the Texas Open Records Act. 7 LICENSES, PERMITS, TAXES The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc. that the bidder is or may be required to pay. a 8 UTILIZATION OF LOCAL BUSINESS RESOURCES Prospective bidders are strongly encouraged to explore and implement methods for the utilization of local resources, and to outline in their bid submittal how they would utilize local resources. k 9 CONFLICT OF INTEREST 9.1 The bidder shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business arrangement with any employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock. 9.2 By signing and executing this bid, the bidder certifies and represents to the City the bidder has not offered, conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the receipt of special treatment, advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation, vote or any other exercise of discretion concerning this bid. 10 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 10.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. 10.2 All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 11 PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge or forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 12 BIDDER INQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS 12.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permit competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's responsibility to advise the Purchasing Manager if any language, requirements, etc., or anv combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Office no later than five (5) calendar days before the bid closing date. A review of such notifications will be made. 12.2 NO BIDDER SHALL REQUEST ANY INFORMATION VERBALLY. ALL REQUESTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION OR CLARIFICATION CONCERNING THIS INVITATION TO BID (ITB) MUST BE SUBMITTED IN WRITING NO LATER THAN FIVE (5) CALENDAR DAYS PRIOR TO THE BID CLOSING DATE AND ADDRESSED TO: ram-. RON SHUFFIELD, SENIOR BUYER City of Lubbock 1625 13'h Street Lubbock, Texas 79401 Fax: (806) 775-2164 Email: BMacnair@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us 13 TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION 13.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within THREE HUNDRED (300) CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. 13.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work k contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to ensure completion of the project within the time specified. 14 PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. IE Wi 15 AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. 16 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 17 GUARANTEES 17.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 17.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. 17.3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub- contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. 17.4 The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. 18 PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 19 PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. 4 r" (c) Equipment schedule. 19 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX 19.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. 19.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 20 PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. P _ 21 BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 22 EXPLOSIVES 22.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage, which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. 22.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. 22.3 In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 23 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 24 INSURANCE 24.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this PP" contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether F performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted before contract execution. 24.2 The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. 25 LABOR AND WORKING HOURS 25.1 Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: 25.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. 25.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. 25.2 Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. 25.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 26 PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or �=^ Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per them wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each 0064 calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. 6 0 27 PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. 28 PREPARATION FOR BID 28.1 The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. 28.2 If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid shall be executed in ink. 28.3 Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: 28.3.1 Bidder's name 28.3.2 Bid for (description of the project). 28.4 Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 28.5 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO BID OPENING. ., 29 BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: " (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. " (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. 30 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of OR Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock about the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations 7 deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include: (a) The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. (b) The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. (c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder. (d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. 31 BID AWARD 31.1 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any or all bids, reject any particular item on a bid, and to waive immaterial formalities and to accept the offer most advantageous to the City of Lubbock in its sole discretion. Unless otherwise specified herein, the City shall award the bid based on the Total Bid Amount. 31.2 All bids are evaluated for compliance with specifications before the bid price is considered. Response to specifications is primary in determining the best low bid. Failure to comply with the specifications may result in disqualification of the bid. 31.3 In case of tie bids, preference will be given to local bidders. Consistent and continued tie bidding may be cause for rejection of bids by the City of Lubbock and/or investigation by the Attorney General to determine possible Anti -Trust violations. 31.4 Before the City may award a bid to a nonresident bidder, the nonresident bidder's bid must be lower than !owest bid submitted by a responsible Texas bidder by the same margin or amount that a Texas bidder would be required to underbid the nonresident bidder in the nonresident bidders' home state. 31.5 Any contract made, or purchase order issued, as a result of this Invitation to Bid, shall be entered into the State of Texas and under the laws of the State of Texas. In connection with the performance of work, the Bidder agrees to comply with the Fair Labor Standard Act, Equal Opportunity Employment Act, and all other applicable Federal, State, and Local laws, regulations, and executive orders to the extent that the same may be applicable. 31.6 NO INDIVIDUAL OF ANY USING DEPARTMENT HAS THE AUTHORITY TO LEGALLY AND/OR FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY TO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PURCHASE ORDER FOR GOODS OR SERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS INVITATION TO BID. E BID SUBMITTAL N BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT DATE: August 28,2002 ROJECT NUMBER: #962-02/RS - CITY OF LUBBOCK HEALTH DEPARTMENT INTERIOR RENOVATIONS !�°d of Minnix Commercial (hereinafter called Bidder) o the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) PM antlemen -he Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation to Bid for the construction of a CITY OF LUBBOCK HEALTH APARTMENT INTERIOR RENOVATIONS having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, Mice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of _ne conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby ,tends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications ,d contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses purred in performing the work required under the contract documents. '°'ATERIALS:6-J'C " � �i•C SERVICES: D � c� �� a, ;,, CS 7-L-,& 4-4c2 ($ /b/ ,, OTAL BID:.rc4 s'�r �-d �0 ) "Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Pin Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written MNotice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 300 (THREE HUNDRED) consecutive calendar :-ays thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to caner as liquidated damages the sum of $250.00 (TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar -y in excess of the time set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general �nditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with struction number 28 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the .iding The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. �. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the :-:s, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to -mmence work on or before the.date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on rich he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. 1 P" Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable. rithout recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the )id submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Jollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of Five Percent Dollars (S cm ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the " %vent the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, nsurance Certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within fifteen (15) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the ,undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRiOR TO BID OPENING. -Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) ,TTEST: p «., n, secretary Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: ,ddenda No. I� Date_8Z0 Addenda No. 7 Dated 7 2—[17 ,ddenda No. 3 Date g-19—ng .ddenda No. 4 Date-S-24—.02 5 date 08-23-02 r� x 1M1BE Firm: I I Woman Blac Date_ August 28, 2002 zed Signature Terry Smith (Printed or Typed Name) Minnix Homes, Inc_ dba Mi nnix o merci al Company 14302 S. Slide Rd Address Lubbock ,lubbock City, County Texas 79424 State Zip Code Telephone: 806 - 798-7335 Fax: 806 - 798-9761 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS Minority Owned Yes No G C ❑ Q ❑ Q ❑ Q Q ❑ G ❑ 3 OM W" CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT To Be Completed by Bidder I� And Attached to Bid Submittal 0 the undersigned Bidder, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been viewed by me with the below identified Insurance Agent/Broker. If 1 am awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within fifteen (15) days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock, irnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid/proposal. Contractor (Signature) Tim Minnix Contractor (Print) CONTRACTOR'S FIRM NAME: minnix Homes, Inc. dba 74innix Commercial P" (Print or Type ) .ZONTRACTOR'S FIRM ADDRESS: 14302 S. Slide Rd Lubbock, Texas 79424 tiame of Agent/Broker: mPc Tn-cLran , Tnc-, _ -,ddress of Agent/Broker: I fiSi grnacivay ;ity/State/Zip: Lubbock, Texas 79401 =.gent'Br cker Telephone Number: ( 806 ) 762-0544 )ate: -August 28, 2002 NOTE TO CONTRACTOR the time requirement specified above is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid/proposal and ward the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, Tease contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806) 775-2165. 0D #162-02/RS - CITY OF LUBBOCK HEALTH DEPARTMENT INTERIOR RENOVATIONS P" CITY OF LUBBOCK WM CONTRACTOR NOTIFICATION AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT ow of the presence of asbestos containing building materials (ACBM) The purpose of this document is to advise the contractoribidder of the .presence and location of ACBM in the building(s) indicated below. The City of Lubbock makes this notification in our continuing effort to comply with all environmental, health, and safety regulations associated with asbestos. Health Department, located at 1902 Texas Avenue in Lubbock, contains Asbestos Containing Building Materials (ACBM). The description of known materials and locations are listed below. Type / Location: Mastic under 12" x 12" floor tile, tan with light & dark spots/ Rm. #'s 16-20, 22-24, 29-32, 51, 75, 76, 77, 79, 82, 83 Type / Location: Mastic under 12" x 12" floor tile, gray with light & dark spots/ Rm. � 21 ." Type / Location: Mastic under 12" x 12" ceiling tile, regular perforations/ Rm. #50 MM The above should not be considered a complete and/or exhaustive list of ACBM in this structure. Materials can be encased behind walls and not readily visible or accessible. Your signature below indicates your acknowledgement and agreement of the following: 1) You have been notified of the presence and location of known ACBM, 2) You will avoid the disturbance of known ACBM unless trained, licensed, and ^ authorized to do so, and 3) You will advise a City representative in the.event of any accidental disturbance of the ACBM listed above. Please return the original, signed version with your bid submittal. Contractor Name: Hi nn i T ca-merci ;1 Contractor Representative: .Terry smith Contractor Signature: Date: nR-7g_n7 Attention Purchasing dept: Pleas or and the signed document to the Facilities Management department, Attn: Asbestos Coordinator ee*e 0 r PAYMENT BOND OWN r r*. THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS AIA Document A312 Payment Bond Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Qwner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business): Minnix Commercial Merchants Bonding Company (Mutual) 14302 S. Slide Rd. 2100 Fleur Drive Lubbock, Texas 79424 Des Moines, la 50321 OWNER (Name and Address): City of Lubbock P.O Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 ..� CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: September 17, 2002 Amount: $330,680.00 #162-02/RS City of Lubbock Health Department Description (Name and Location): Interior Renovation BOND Tx592820 r� Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date): Amount: $330,680.00 Modifications to this Bond: { ] None See Page 6 r CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: Company: (Corporate Seal) (Corporate Seal) Minnix Commercial Merchants Bonding Company (Mutual) 14302 S. Slide Rd., Lubbock, texas 7924 2100 Fleur Drive, Des Moines, la. 50321 Signature: r�P� Signature: c' Name and Title: � �,;.va sec ,�O�est ev r Name and Title: Don E. Smith, Attomey-in-Fact (Any additional signatures appear on page 6) MIR (FOR INFORMATION ONLY -Name, Address and Telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect, Engineer or other party): ,.., Smith Construction Bonding Inc. 3116 Kellway Drive —Suite 110 Carrollton, TX 75006 (972) 732-8175 AIA DOCUMENT A312 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND - DECEMBER 1984 ED. - AIA 0 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006 A312-1984 OR THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS AIA Document A312 Payment Bond Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Qwner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business): Minnix Commercial Merchants Bonding Company (Mutual) 14302 S. Slide Rd. 2100 Fleur Drive Lubbock, Texas 79424 Des Moines, la 50321 OWNER (Name and Address): City of Lubbock P.O Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 ..� CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: September 17, 2002 Amount: $330,680.00 #162-02/RS City of Lubbock Health Department Description (Name and Location): Interior Renovation BOND Tx592820 r� Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date): Amount: $330,680.00 Modifications to this Bond: { ] None See Page 6 r CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: Company: (Corporate Seal) (Corporate Seal) Minnix Commercial Merchants Bonding Company (Mutual) 14302 S. Slide Rd., Lubbock, texas 7924 2100 Fleur Drive, Des Moines, la. 50321 Signature: r�P� Signature: c' Name and Title: � �,;.va sec ,�O�est ev r Name and Title: Don E. Smith, Attomey-in-Fact (Any additional signatures appear on page 6) MIR (FOR INFORMATION ONLY -Name, Address and Telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect, Engineer or other party): ,.., Smith Construction Bonding Inc. 3116 Kellway Drive —Suite 110 Carrollton, TX 75006 (972) 732-8175 AIA DOCUMENT A312 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND - DECEMBER 1984 ED. - AIA 0 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006 A312-1984 OR 0 or d r 1 The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2 With respect to the Owner, this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor: 2.1 Promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due Claimants, and 2.2 Defends, indemnifies and holds harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens or suits by any person or entity whose claim, demand, lien or suit is for the payment for labor, materials or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, provided the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) of any claims, demands, liens or suits and tendered defense of such claims,demands, liens or suits to the Contractor and the Surety, and provided there is no Owner Default. 3 With respect to Claimants, this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due. 4 The Surety shall have no obligation to Claimants under this Bond until: 4.1 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor have given notice to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim. 4.2 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor: .1 Have furnished written notice to the Contractor and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, within 90 days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the claim stating, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim and the name of the party to whom the materials were furnished or supplied or for whom PAR the labor was done or performed; and .2 Have either received a rejection in whole or in part from the Contractor, or not received within 30 days of furnishing the above notice any communication from the Contractor by which the Contactor has indicated the claim will be paid directly or indirectly; and Not having been paid within the above 30 days, have sent a written notice to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and enclosing a copy of the previous written notice furnished to the Contractor. 5 If a notice required by Paragraph 4 is given by the Owner to the Contractor or to the Surety, that is sufficient compliance. ..w 6 When the Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 4, the Surety shall promptly and at, the Surety's expense take the following actions: A312• Performance 6.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within 45 days undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed after receipt of the claim, stating the amounts that are. 6.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts. 7 The Surety's total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety. 8 Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any Construction Performance Bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and the Surety under this Bond, subject to the Owner's priority to use the funds for the completion of the work. 9 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligations to make payments to, give notices on behalf of, or otherwise have obligations to Claimants under this Bond. 10 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. 11 No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant gave the notice required by Subparagraph 4.1 or Clause 4.2 (III), or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. 12 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature page. Actual receipt of notice by Surety, the Owner or the Contractor, however accomplished, shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received at the address shown on the signature page. 13 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. f 14 Upon request b an person or entity appearing to be a mechanic's lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the P q Y Y P tY PP g Y 1 potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor shall promptly labor, materials or equipment were furnished. furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made. .�* 15.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the 15 DEFINITIONS Owner and the Contractor identified on the signature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. 15.1 Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract .., with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials or equipment for use in the 15.3 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither performance of the Contract. The intent of this Bond shall be been remedied nor waived, to pay the Contractor as required to include without limitation in the terms "labor, materials or by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or equipment' that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, comply with the other terms thereof. gasoline, telephone service or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectual and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors, and all other items for which a MODIFICATIONS TO THIS BOND ARE AS FOLLOWS: NONE (Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: ( Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: Signature: Name and TltlP- Name and Title: Address: Address: AIA DOCUMENT A312 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND - DECEMBER 1984 ED. - AIA 0 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE.. N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A312-1984 6 om ff— • Merchants Bonding Company I I s (Mutual) POWER OF ATTORNEY Bond No. TX592820 Know All Persons By These Presents, that the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL), a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and having its principal office in the City of Des Moines, County of Polk, State of Iowa, hath made, constituted and appointed, and does by these presents make, constitute and appoint Don E. Smith of CanTollton and State of Texas its true and lawful Attorney4n-Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to sign, execute, acknowledge and deliver in its behalf as surety any and all bonds, undertakings, recognizances or other written obligations in the nature thereof, subject to the limitation that any such instrument shall not exceed the amount of: TR70 MILLION FIVE ITUNDRED THOUSAND (2,500,000.00) DOLLARS and to bind the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bond or undertaking was signed by the duly authorized officers of the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL), and all the acts of said Attorney -in -Fact, pursuant to the authority herein given, are hereby ratified and confirmed. This Power -of -Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following Amended Substituted and Restated By - Laws adopted by the Board of Directors of the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) on October 3, 1992. ARTICLE 11, SECTION 8 - The Chairman of the Board or President or any Vice President or Secretary shall have power and authority to appoint Attorneys -in -Fact, and to authorize them to execute on behalf of the Company, and attach the Seal of the Company thereto, bonds and undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof. ARTICLE 11, SECTION 9 - The signature of any authorized officer and the Seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or Certification thereof authorizing the execution and delivery of any bond, undertaking, recognizance, or other suretyship obligations of the Company, and such signature and seal when so used shall have the same force and effect as though manually fixed. In Witness Whereof, MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) has caused these presents to be signed by its President and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed, this 2nd day of January 2002 , • p�N Cohi . MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) ,�XX o,.o PO9q y • a:` : 3• 1933 ,: c' y =��•...... 'ate STATE OF IOWA • • • .. , . • • • President COUNTY OF POLK ss. On this 2nd day of January , 2002 . before me appeared Larry Taylor, to me personally known, who being by me duly swom did say that he is President of the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL), the corporation described in the foregoing instrument, and that the Seal affixed to the said instrument is the Corporate Seal of the said Corporation and that the said instrument was signed and sealed in behalf of said Corporation by authority of its Board of Directors. In Testimony Whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal at the City of Des Moines, Iowa, the day and year first above written. sw 0 i. RUT MCCLgW ; - Commission Number 201299 ,W^ My Commission Ex ires Februagt 19, 20�4 Notary Public, Polk County, Iowa STATE OF IOWA �w COUNTY OF POLK ss. I, William Warner, Jr., Secretary of the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL), do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the POWER -OF -ATTORNEY executed by said MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL), which is still in force and effect. In Witness Whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seal of tfie Company on this 1 7th day of September �06, ''.n.••. !/�,� �. P 0Or- , Coy •• o� ' R1'Og'-'O - Y`y• C'0 9� 9y� : Secretary 1933 : C: MSC 0814 (7/0Z) •s• 7• MIA r-e n moo THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS AIA Document A312 Performance Bond Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business): Minnix Commercial Merchants Bonding Company (Mutual) 14302 S. Slide Rd. 2100FIeur Drive Lubbock, Texas 79424 Des Moines, la. %0321 OWNER (Name and Address): City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: September 17, 2002 ..� Amount: $330,680.00 Description (Name and Location): BOND Tx592820 Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date) Amount: $330,680.00 Modifications to this Bond: #162-021RS City of Lubbock Health Department Interior Renovation ❑ None CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL Company: (Corporate Seal) Minnix Commercial 14302 S. Slide Rd. ,Lubbock Texas 79424 Signature Name and Title: r �� yFr,/� A. 7 (Any additional signatures appear on page 3) See page 3 SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Merchants Bonding Company (Mutual) 2100 Fleur Drive �D-ess Moines, Ia. 50321 Signature: a� <��! �� s Name and Title: Don E. Smith, Attorney -in -Fact (FOR INFORMATION ONLY -Name, Address and Telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect, Engineer or Smith Construction Bonding Inc. other party): 3116 Kellway Drive — Suite 110 Carrollton, TX 75006 (972) 732 8175 AIA DOCUMENT A312 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND - DECEMBER 1984 ED- AIA a THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE.. N.W.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A312-1984 I THIRD PR/NT1NG -MARCH 1987 W 0 J I The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, .hind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2 If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except to participate in conferences as provided in Subparagraph 3 If there is no Owner Default, the Surety's obligation under this Bond shall arise after: 3.1 The Owner has notified the Contractor and the Surety at its address described in Paragraph 10 below that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default and has requested and attempted to arrange a conference with the Contractor and the Surety to be held not later than fifteen days after receipt of such notice to discuss methods of performing the Construction Contract. If the Owner, the Contractor and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner's right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; and 3.2 The Owner has declared a Contractor Default and formally terminated the Contractor's right to complete the contract. Such Contractor Default shall not be declared earlier than twenty days after the Contractor and the Surety have received notice as provided in Subparagraph 3.1; and 3.3 The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price to the Surety in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract in accordance with the terms of the contract with the Owner. 4 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take one of the following actions: 4.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract; or 4.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or through independent contractors; or 4.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and the Contractor selected with the Owner's concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 6 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner resulting from the Contractor's default; or 4.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances: 1. After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, tender payment therefor to the Owner; or AIA DOCUMENT A312 . PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND. DECCEMBER 1984 ED. AIA THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W. WASHINGTON. D.C.2006 1 2. Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner citing reasons therefor. 5 If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 4 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond fifteen days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Subparagraph 4.4, and the Owner refuses the payment tendered or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. 6 After the Owner has terminated the Contractor's right to complete the Construction Contract, and if the Surety elects to act under Subparagraph 4.1, 4.2, or 4.3 above, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. To the limit of the amount of this Bond, but subject to commitment by the Owner of the Balance of the Contract Price to mitigation of costs and damages on the Construction Contract, the Surety is obligated without duplication for: 6.1 The responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract; 6,2 Additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor's Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 4; and 6.3 Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor. 7 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators or successors. 8 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. 9 Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. if the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jursidiction of the suit shall be applicable. A312-1983 0 10 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature page. 11 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 12 DEFINITIONS 12.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the MODIFICATIONS TO THIS BOND ARE AS FOLLOWS: NONE Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contract. 12.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the signature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. 12.3 Contractor Default: Failure of the Contractor, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with the terms of the Construction Contract. 12.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Contractor as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof. PAN (Space is provided below for additional signatures of added SURETY parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) Company: CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL (Corporate Seal) Company: Signature: Signature: _ Name and Title: Name and Title A�irlracc Address: P" (Corporate Seal) AIA DOCUMENT A312 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND - DECEMBER 1984 ED. - AIA A A312-1984 3 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVE.. N.W.. WASHINGTON. D.C. 200% rice eie�+ CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE W,.' F— ACORD CERTIFICATE OF L PRODUCER (806)762-0544 FAX (806)741-1527 Grimes Insurance Agency, Inc. 1651 Broadway Lubbock, TX 79401 Written through Quirk & Company PO Box 792030 San Antonio,TX 78279 INSURED Minnix Homes, Inc. TIM Contractors P.O. Box 64895 Lubbock, TX 79464 31 L I TY INSURANCE DATE (MMIDDNY) 09/27/2002 ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE INSURER A: Western World Insurance Co. INSURER B: INSURER C`. INSURER D: INSURER E: THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. MiK LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER DATE (MMIDDIYY) DATE (MMIDDIYY) LIMITS A GENERAL LIABILITY X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADE D OCCUR 4PP752146 05/06/2002 05/06/2003 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $ 50,000 MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5,000 PERSONAL BADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: POLICY PRO LOC JECT PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 1,000,000 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ GARAGE LIABILITY ANY AUTO AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ OTHER THAN EA ACC AUTO ONLY: AGG $ $ EXCESS LIABILITY OCCUR D CLAIMS MADE DEDUCTIBLE RETENTION $ EACH OCCURRENCE $ AGGREGATE $ $ $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY TORY LIMITS ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYE $ E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT 1 $ OTHER DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONSILOCATIONSIVEHICLESIEXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENTISPECIAL PROVISIONS Waiver of Subrogation & additional insured CERTIFICATE HOLDER ADDITIONAL INSURED; INSURER LETTER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL TO DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, rK�+ City of Lubbock BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY P.O. BOX 2000 OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. Lubbock, TX 79457 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE �j f! Richard Duncan/DMB laseAQUKU - c r� CERTIFICATE HOLDER ADDITIONAL INSURED; INSURER LETTER !^A l City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, TX 79457 A ACORDM CERTIFI( PRODUCER (806)762-0544 F, Grimes Insurance Agency, Inc. 1651 Broadway Lubbock, TX 79401 INSURED Minnix Homes, Inc. T]M Contractors P.O. Box 64895 Lubbock, TX 79464 kTE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE I DATE(MM/DD/YY) 09/23/2002 (806) 741-1527 ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE INSURER A: Texas Mutual Insurance Co. INSURER B: INSURER C: INSURER D: INSURER E: THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACTOR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER DATE (MM/DD/YY) DATE (MM/DD/YY) LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADE 7 OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $ MED EXP (Any one person) $ PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ GENERAL AGGREGATE $ GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: POLICY PROJECT LOC PRODUCTS - COMPIOP AGG $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ GARAGE LIABILITY ANY AUTO AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ OTHER THAN EA ACC AUTO ONLY: AGG $ $ EXCESS LIABILITY OCCUR CLAIMS MADE DEDUCTIBLE RETENTION $ EACH OCCURRENCE $ AGGREGATE $ $ $ A WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY TSF0001095348 03/01/2002 03/01/2003 1 TORYLIMITS I ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 500,000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 500,000 E.L. DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT $ 500,000 OTHER DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONSNEHICLES/EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT/SPECIAL PROVISIONS lanket Waiver of Subrogation applies to Certificate holder. l+Ar4%,r LLA 1 IUIV SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL _ 0 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. rHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Richard Duncan/DMB 'IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. Kai es+sl COVERAGES ACORD CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE TM DATE(MM/DD/YY) 09/23/2002 PRODUCER (806)762-0544 FAX (806)741-1S27 Grimes Insurance Agency, Inc. 1651 Broadway Lubbock, TX 79401 ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE INSURED Minnix Homes, Inc, T7M Contractors P.O. Box 6489S Lubbock, TX 79464 INSURER A: Safeco Insurance Co. INSURERB: INSURERC: INSURERD: INSURER E: THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE- MAYBE fSSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,` EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER DATE (MM/DD/YY) DATE (MM/DDIYY) LIMITS nes>a GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $ CLAIMS MADE D OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $ PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ GENERAL AGGREGATE $ GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ POLICY PRO LOC JECT El AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY X ANY AUTO D4BA4380674 07/29/2002 07/29/2003 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ 1,000,000 BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ s� ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS A X HIRED AUTOS X NON -OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ s_ GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ r— ANY AUTO OTHER THAN EA ACC $ AUTO ONLY: AGG $ EXCESS LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ OCCUR D CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE $ r_ $ DEDUCTIBLE $ RETENTION $ $ sues WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY TY0'rP LIMITS ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYE9 $ E.L. DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT I $ s OTHER Auto Physical Damage 46A4380674 07/29/2002 07/29/2003 $250 Ded. Comprehensive A $250 Ded. Collision ■M DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONSILOCATIONSIVEHICLES/EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT/SPECIAL PROVISIONS certificate holder is named as Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation applies as their nterest may appear City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, TX 79457 ADDITIONAL INSURED; INSURER LETTER SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL TO DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. rHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE / h t s , e� Richard Duncan/DMB IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. 4 CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: !- (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: 2 vii REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; . (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services.❑ 3 CONTRACT P" CONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 17th day of September, 2002 by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Minnix Commercial of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and inconsideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID #162-02/RS - CITY OF LUBBOCK HEALTH DEPARTMENT INTERIOR RENOVATIONS - $330,680.00 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. ATTEST: CITY O BBO TE (OWNER) City Secretary r M RC MCDOUGAL, MAYOR VE S CO TENT: v 9Zy Owner's Rep esent e APPROVED AS TO FORM: ity Attorney ATTEST: Co orate Secretary Cmt CONTRACTOR: By: •--'� PRINTED NAME:'/l/Y/ TITLE: /��F� ,, -r COMPLETE ADDRESS: Minnix Commercial 14302 S. Slide Road Lubbock,Texas 79424 6 �A PON e`+ GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT P" GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co- partnership or corporation, to wit MINNIX COMMERCIAL who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or their legal representative. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative HARLAN STAUFFER, FACILITIES MANAGER, so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed O Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes referred to herein as the "contract" or "contract documents". 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. P" 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless r_ N otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall .� accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. ®„ 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work .� which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) 7% 2 P" calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications °A provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's Representative and Contractor. Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKERS The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or ^° men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. 0 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation that may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term"extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work. -,+ In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by A.. them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." r- 5 No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as — provided under Method (C)(1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement of any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. ' The Certificates of Insurance furnished by the Contractor and Subcontractors shall name the City of Lubbock as an additional insured. If no subcontractors will be used, said insurance certificate shall be accompanied by a written statement from the Contractor stating to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. A. General Liability Insurance a" 0 r" The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1,000,000.00 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury Advertising Injury B. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, LO Combined Single Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $500 000.00 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -owned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. 7 D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance. The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 0% of the total contract price (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. E. Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $0on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000.00. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC- 83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental — entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section ❑406.096, Texas Labor Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has — undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner- - operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and I (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the �^ project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas ` Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration` of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of - coverage ends during the duration of the project; PON (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; Nam (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by _ paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance � 9 tt Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the A governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; 10 (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the r following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE 'The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation w. insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 5121440-3789 to receive information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your �^ employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage;" and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: "By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this contract is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that ' the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all .�. coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the - commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions."; (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: 11 (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (i)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's Representative prior to bidding. 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, 12 n the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such PM laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within •� said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may n enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required �* in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as provided by the contract documents. a•• 34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in 4 this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $250.00 (TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. k*■t 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that ew when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. 13 The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and employees, against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. 14 w.. 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. a.. 41. PAYMENTS �^^ No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents. Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to '^ enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. 43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete the work within the time provided in this contract. 44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final r� completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final ' completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion, PON 15 Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or "— warranties implied by law or otherwise. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's Representative. 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. 16 After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual ,written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the �* Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. 50. BONDS The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 54. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. 55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same 18 may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. 19 E �"° CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS PM am r RE: RESOLUTION NO. 6262, ITEM NO. 39, APRIL 8, 1999 EXHIBIT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Craft Hourly Rate Acoustical Ceiling Installer 11.50 Air Conditioner Installer 12.50 Air Conditioner Installer -Helper 6.25 Asbestos Worker 9.00 Asbestos Supervisor 12.50 Bricklayer 12.50 Bricklayer -Helper 7.00 Carpenter 11.00 Carpenter -Helper 7.00 Cement Finisher 8.00 Drywall Hanger 11.00 Electrician 13.75 Electrician -Helper 7.00 Equipment Operator -Heavy 9.50 Equipment Operator -Light 8.50 Floor Installer 9.50 Glazier 10.50 Insulator-Piping/Boiler 11.50 Insulator -Helper 7.00 Iron Worker 11.00 Laborer -General 6.00 Mortar Mixer 6.00 Painter 9.50 Plumber 12.50 Plumber -Helper 7.00 Roofer 9.00 Roofer -Helper 7.00 Sheet Metal Worker 10.00 Sheet Metal Worker -Helper 7.00 Welder -Certified 11.00 EXHIBIT B Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Hourly Rate Asphalt Heaterman 9.00 Asphalt Shoveler 6.00 Concrete Finisher 8.00 Concrete Finisher -Helper 7.00 Electrician 12.00 Flagger 6.00 Form Setter 7.00 Form Setter -Helper 6.25 Laborer -General 6.00 Laborer -Utility 6.75 Mechanic 8.00 Mechanic -Helper 7.00 Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Paving Machine 7.75 Bulldozer 8.00 Concrete Paving Machine 7.75 Front End Loader 7.25 Heavy Equipment Operator 8.00 Light Equipment Operator 7.25 Motor Grader Operator 9.50 Roller 6.75 Scraper 7.25 Tractor 7.25 Truck Driver -Light 6.50 Truck Driver -Heavy 7.00 2 EXHIBIT C Prevailing Wage Rates G Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. EXHIBIT D Prevailing Wage Rates Legal Holiday Rate The rate for legal holidays shall be as required by the fair Labor Standards Act. .R a t a �» 3 ,�, SPECIFICATIONS Specifications CITY OF LUBBOCK HEALTH DEPARTMENT INTERIOR RENOVATION July 2002 PSC Project #: 03879402 ��mw P NCO yy�i` � 9 ✓I n Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. �� 14746 Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners OF DIVISIONS 1 THROUGH 14 — — 0 ter FANNING, FANNING & ASSOCIATES -• -� •� CONSULTING ENGINEERS S&ROF V A"r4NING 2555 74th STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79423""""'�"•0 (806) 745-2533 -0, _ 61441. - JZa DIVISIONS 15 AND 16 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 0 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT INFORMATION Not Used DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 Summary of Work......................................................................................................................2 01019 Contract Considerations.............................................................................................................2 01039 Coordination and Meetings........................................................................................................4 01090 Reference Standards.................................................................................................................17 01300 Administrative Requirements.....................................................................................................5 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls.............................................................................................4 01600 Product Requirements................................................................................................................ 3 01650 Starting of Systems....................................................................................................................2 01700 Execution Requirements............................................................................................................3 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK 02072 Minor Demolition for Remodeling............................................................................................. 3 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE Not Used DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04200 Unit Masonry ............................................................................................................................. 5 DIVISION 5 - METAL Not Used DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06114 Wood Blocking and Curbing..................................................................................................... 3 06410 Custom Casework...................................................................................................................... 6 06610 Glass -Fiber -Reinforced Plastic...................................................................................................2 03879400 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 1 07/02 — Interior Renovation W DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210 Building Insulation.....................................................................................................................3 07900 Joint Sealers............................................................................................................................... 5 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08000 Door Schedule............................................................................................................................3 08110 Steel Doors and Frames.............................................................................................................5 08211 Flush Wood Doors.....................................................................................................................4 08700 Hardware....................................................................................................................................... 11 08800 Glazing.......................................................................................................................................4 I�U��Z�]i;L�l►I. M 09250 Gypsum Board Systems.............................................................................................................7 09510 Acoustical Ceilings....................................................................................................................6 09650 Resilient Flooring And Base...................................................................................................... 5 09680 Carpeting....................................................................................................................................4 09900 Painting....................................................................................................................................12 09915 Color Schedule...........................................................................................................................4 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10100 Visual Display Boards................................................................................................................3 10160 Metal Toilet Compartments.......................................................................................................3 10800 Toilet Accessories......................................................................................................................6 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT Not Used DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS Not Used DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Used DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS Not Used 03879400 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation =f r DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15000 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical ...................................................................12 15300 Piping and Accessories..............................................................................................................6 15310 Plumbing Systems......................................................................................................................2 15400 Air Distribution..........................................................................................................................3 15500 Hangers and Supports................................................................................................................3 15550 Vibration Isolation................................................................................................................... 2 15600 Insulation...................................................................................................................................3 15700 Equipment..................................................................................................................................4 15800 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Mechanical Systems.............................................................2 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 Raceways and Fittings................................................................................................................4 16101 Conductors................................................................................................................................. 3 16211 Wiring Devices.......................................................................................................................... 3 16411 Grounding.................................................................................................................................. 2 16510 Electrical Distribution................................................................................................................ 3 16610 Lighting......................................................................................................................................2 16701 Motors and Equipment Controls and Wiring.............................................................................2 16810 Fire Alarm and Detection System..............................................................................................6 03879400 07/02 — Interior Renovation TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 3 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work covered by Contract Documents. B. Work by Owner. C. Owner furnished products. D. Contractor use of site. E. Future work. F. Work Sequence. G. Owner occupancy. 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Location: 1902 Texas Avenue, Lubbock, Texas. B. Verbal Summary: Without force or effect on requirements of the Contract Documents a brief description of the Project is as follows: The interior renovation of an existing office building to include new offices, upgrade of finishes and accessibility. 1.4 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner will award contracts which will commence at an undetermined time after the start of construction on this project. Work under these contracts will include: 1. Telephone System: The Owner will contract for furnishing and installing of a telephone network system. 2. Installation of computer cabling. B. Items noted NIC' (Not in Contract), will be furnished and installed by Owner as required to meet the occupancy schedule. 1.5 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS -- A. Products furnished to the site and paid for by Owner: 1. Residential appliances not scheduled nor specified to be furnished as part of this project. 2. Electronic equipment: copiers, shredders, other. B. Owner's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to Contractor. 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site. 3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor. 03879400 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1 07/02 — Interior Renovation 4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient items. 5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections and service. C. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage, jointly with Owner. 3. Handle, store, install and finish products. 4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt. 1.6 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE A. Limit use of site to allow: 1. Work by Others and Work by Owner. B. Construction Operations: Limited to areas indicated on drawings to be constructed. C. The facility will be occupied by the Owner throughout construction. 1.7 WORK SEQUENCE A. During the construction period, coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner and Architect: Normal hours of operation are 7:30 am to 5:30 pm, Monday through Friday. A 24 hour notice to Owner must be given prior to working before or after normal hours of operation. Contractor will not be given key to facility. 1.8 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner's operations. B. Schedule the Work to accommodate this requirement. PART 2 -PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 -PART EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03879400 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation SECTION 01019 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Schedule of Values. B. Application for Payment. C. Change Procedures. D. Measurement and payment - unit prices. E. Alternates. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Schedule of Values. B. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Product substitutions. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit typed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. C. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Specification. Identify each line item with number and title of the major specification Section. Identify site mobilization, bonds and insurance. D. Include within each line item, a directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. E. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Submit three copies of each application on AIA Form G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet. B. Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment. C. Payment Period: As defined in Owner -Contractor agreement. D. Include one copy of waiver of liens from each subcontractor. 1.6 CHANGE PROCEDURES A. The Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time as described in the General Conditions of the Agreement. By issuing Architect's Supplemental Instruction form. 03879400 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 01019 - 1 a 07/02 — Interior Renovation B. The Architect may issue a Construction Change Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications and a change in Contract Time for executing the change. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate within 7 days. C. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting request for change to the Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a statement describing 4 the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01600. D. Cost Determination: As defined in Article 24 - EXTRA WORK of the General Conditions of the Agreement. E. Change Order Forms: to be provided by City. �. F. Execution of Change Orders: Owner will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. 1.7 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT - UNIT PRICES A. Authority: Measurement methods are delineated in the individual specification sections. B. Take measurements and compute quantities. The Architect will verify measurements and quantities. C. Unit Quantities: quantities and measurements indicated in the Bid Form are for contract purposes only. Actual quantities provided will determine payment. D. Payment Includes: Full compensation for required labor, Products, tools, equipment, plant, transportation, services and incidentals; erection, application or installation of an item of the Work; overhead and profit. -� E. Defect Assessment: Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements. If, in the opinion of the Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. F. Unit Price Schedule: As indicated in the Bid Submittal. 1.8 ALTERNATES A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the Owner's option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in Owner -Contractor Agreement. B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required. C. Schedule of Alternates - None. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03879400 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 01019 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation - SECTION 01039 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination. B. Field engineering. C. Preconstruction meeting. D. Preinstallation meetings. E. Cutting and patching. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of the Project Manual to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D. In finished areas, except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E. Large Apparatus: Any large piece of apparatus which is to be installed in any space in the building, and which is too large to permit access through windows, doorways or shafts, shall be brought to the job by the Contractor involved and placed in the space before the enclosing structure is completed. F. Items which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location 7. Control devices and details G. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owners occupancy. 03879400 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01039 - 1 07/02 — Interior Renovation H. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice to Proceed. B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect, Contractor and major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 2. Distribution of Contract Documents. 3. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, Schedule of Values, and progress schedule. 4. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract and the Architect. 5. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders and Contract closeout procedures. 6. Scheduling. a. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. b. Owner's requirements and partial occupancy. C. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. d. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. e. Survey and building layout. f. Security and housekeeping procedures. g. Schedules. h. Procedures for testing. i. Procedures for maintaining record documents. j. Requirements for start-up of equipment. k. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. 7. Scheduling activities of geotechnical Engineer. D. Record minutes and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants with two copies to Architect and those affected by decisions made. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETING A. When required in individual specification Sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at work site prior to commencing work of the Section. B. Require attendance of parries directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific Section. C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting. 1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes, and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants, with three copies to Architect. 03879400 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01039 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation w_ PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Motors: Specific motor type is specified in individual specification sections. B. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box. C. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector for connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual specification sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. Notify Architect of existing site or substrate conditions that conflict with drawings. B. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. C. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct location. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply any manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching. B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements which affects: 1. Structural integrity of element. 2. Integrity of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant elements. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. 4. Visual qualities of sight -exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work, and to: 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. 2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming Work. 4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. -. D. Execute work by methods which will avoid damage to other Work, and provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. F. Restore Work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 03879400 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01039 - 3 r� 07/02 — Interior Renovation G. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids. I. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. J. Identify any hazardous substance or condition exposed during the Work to the Architect for decision or remedy. END OF SECTION 03879400 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01039 - 4 07/02 — Interior Renovation SECTION 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance. B. Schedule of references. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents. C. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents. D. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. E. The contractual relationship duties and responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of the Architect shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES AA Aluminum Association (202) 862-5100 900 19th St., NW Washington, DC 20006 www.aluminum.or AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 1518 K St., NW Washington, DC 20005 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 1827 Walden Office Sq., Suite 104 Schaumburg, IL 60173-4268 www.aamanet.M 03879400 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 1 r+, 07/02 — Interior Renovation AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation (202) 624-5800 Officials (800) 231-3475 _. 444 North Capitol St., NW, Suite 249 Washington, DC 20001 www.aashto.org AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (919) 549-8141 P.O. Box 12215 One Davis Drive -- Research Triangle Park, NC 27709-2215 www. aatcc. org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 429-5155 1200 19th St., NW, Suite 300 Washington, DC 20036-2422 www.abma-dc.org ACGIH American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (513) 742-2020 1330 Kemper Meadow Dr. Suite 600 .- Cincinnati, Ohio 45240 www.acszih.org ACI American Concrete Institute (248) 848-3700 P.O. Box 9094 Farmington Hills, MI 48333 www.aci-int.org -. ADC Air Diffusion Council (312) 201-0101 104 South Michigan Ave., Suite 1500 Chicago, IL 60603 ADSC The International Association of Foundation Drilling (214) 681-5994 9696 Skillman Street, Suite 280 Dallas, TX 75243 www.adsc-iafd.com AF&PA American Forest and Paper Association (202) 463-2700 1111 19th St., NW, Suite 800 Washington, DC 20036 www.afandpa.org AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 400 N. Capitol St., NW Suite 450 Washington, DC, 20001 www.aga.org 03879400 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation AGC Associated General Contractors of America (703) 548-3118 333 John Carlyle Street Suite 200 Alexandria, VA 22314 www.agc.org AHA American Hardboard Association (847) 934-8800 1210 W. Northwest Hwy Palatine, IL 60067 www.hardboard.or� Al Asphalt Institute Research Park Drive P.O. Box 14052 Lexington, KY 40512-4052 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects AISC American Institute of Steel Construction One East Wacker Dr., Suite 3100 Chicago, IL 60601-2001 www.aisc.or AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1101 17th St., NW, Suite 1300 Washington, DC 20036 www.steel.org (606) 288-4960 (312) 670-2400 (202) 452-7100 (800) 277-3850 AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 7012 S. Revere Pkwy, Suite 140 Englewood, CO 80112 www.aitc-glulam.org AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. 30 W. University Dr. Arlington Heights, IL 60004-1893 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute 1819 L. Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 www.ansi.org APA/EWA APA-The Engineered Wood Association P.O. Box 11700 Tacoma, WA 98411-0700 www.apawood.or 03879400 REFERENCE STANDARDS ,w►, 07/02 — Interior Renovation (847) 394-0150 (202)293-8020 (253) 565-6600 01090 - 3 API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 1220 L St., NW Washington, DC 20005-4070 www.api.org AREMA American Railway Engineering and Maintenance -of -Way (301) 459-3200 Association 8201 Corporate Drive, Suite 1125 Landover, MD 02785-2230 N ww.arema.org ARI Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 4301 Fairfax Dr., Suite 425 Arlington, VA 22203 www.ari.org ARRA Asphalt Recycling and Reclaiming Association (410) 267-0023 #3 Church Circle, PMB 250 Annapolis, MD 21401 ta www.arra.or ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 World Headquarters (703) 295-6300 1801 Alexander Graham Bell Dr. Reston, VA 20191-4400 r. www.asce.org ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723 Air -Conditioning Engineers (404) 636-8400 ®' 1791 Tullie Circle, NE Atlanta, GA 30329 www.ashrae.org d- ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers (800) 843-2763 3 Park Ave. New York, NY 10016-5990 www.asme.org ASPA American Sod Producers Association - ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers (773) 693-2773 8614 W. Catalpa Avenue Suite 1007 Chicago, IL 60656-1116 wvv.aspe.org 8080 ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 901 Canterbury, Suite A Westlake, OH 44145 —' www.asse-plumbin .org 03879400 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 4 07/02 — Interior Renovation F ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials (601) 832-9585 100 Barr Harbor Dr. r West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959 www.astm.org AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (703) 733-0600 1952 Isaac Newton Sq. West Reston, VA 20190 www.awinet.org AWPA American Wood -Preservers' Association (817) 326-6300 P.O. Box 5690 Granbury, TX 76049 www.ana.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 550 NW LeJeune Rd. (305) 443-9353 Miami, FL 33126 www.amweld.org AWWA American Water Works Association (303) 794-7711 6666 W. Quincy Ave. Denver, CO 80235 www.awwa.orjz ' BHMA Builders' Hardware Manufacturer Association (212) 297-2122 355 Lexington Avenue, 17th floor New York, NY 10017 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Institute of America (703) 620-0010 The Brick Industry Association 11490 Commerce Park Drive Reston, VA 28191-1525 www.bia.ora CDA Copper Development Association Inc. (800) 232-3282 260 Madison Ave., 16th Floor (212) 251-7200 New York, NY 10016 www.copper.or CFR Code of Federal Regulations CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 412-0900 1725 Jefferson Davis Hwy, Suite 1004 Arlington, VA 22202-4102 www.cganet.com �y 03879400 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 5 ,�,, 07/02 — Interior Renovation CISCA Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 1500 Lincoln Hwy, Suite 202 St. Charles, IL 60174 www.cisca.or CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 5959 Shallowford Rd., Suite 419 Chattanooga, TN 37421 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 9891 Broken Land Pkwy, Suite 300 Columbia, MD 21046 www. chainlinkinfo. orb CPSC US Consumer Product Safety Commission (301) 504-0990 1 Washington, DC 20207-0001 www.cpsc gov CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (800) 882-8846 310 S. Holiday Ave. (706) 278-3176 Dalton, GA 30722-2048 www.cqMet-rug.co CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 933 N. Plum Grove Rd. Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758 www.crsi.org CSSB Cedar Shake and Shingle Bureau (604) 462-8961 P.O. Box 1178 Sumas, WA 98295 _ www.cedarbureau.or CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 530 Wells Fargo Drive, Suite 218 Houston, TX 77090 www.cti.org DASMA Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 International 1300 Summer Avenue Cleveland, OH 44115-2851 www.dasma.com DHI The Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 14150 Newbrook Dr., Suite 200 Chantilly, VA 20151 www.dhi.or� 03879400 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 6 07/02 — Interior Renovation DOT Department of Transportation (202) 366-4000 400 7th Street, S.W. Washington D.C. 20590 www.dot.gov EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 3000 Corporate Center Dr., Suite 270 (770) 968-7945 Morrow, GA 30260 :-� www.eifsfacts.com EJCDC Engineers' Joint Contract Documents Committee (202) 347-7474 American Consulting Engineers Council 1015 15`h Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20005 www.acec.or� EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association (914) 332-0040 25 North Broadway Tarrytown, NY 10591 www.ejma.oriz EPA Environmental Protection Agency (800) 490-9198 US EPA/NSCEP P.O. Box 42419 Cincinnati, Ohio 45242 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (202) 366-4000 800 Independence Ave., SW Washington, DC 20591 ., www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322 445 12th Street, SW r•. Washington, DC 20554 www.fcc.gov FM FM Global (781) 762-4300 Corporate Headquarters. P.O. Box 7500 Johnston, RI 02919 www.factorymutual.com FS Federal Specification Unit (703) 305-5682 General Services Admin. Federal Supply Service �., FSS Acquisition Management Center Environmental Programs and Engineering Policy Division Washington, DC 20406 htti):/ipub.fss.gsa.gov 03879400 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 7 �„� 07/02 — Interior Renovation GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 810 First St., NE, Suite 510 Washington, DC 20002 www.usg.com www. gypsum. org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 2945 Southwest Wanamaker Dr., Suite A Topeka, KS 66614 -- www.glasswebsite.com/gana HI Hydronics Institute (703) 525-7060 �. Division of Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association 2107 Wilson Blvd., Suite 600 Arlington, VA 22201 www.gamanet.org HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (312) 332-0405 Division of NAAMM 8 South Michigan Ave., Suite 1000 Chicago, EL 60603 www.naamm. orb ._ HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association HPW H.P. White Laboratory (410) 838-6550 3114 Scarboro Road Street, Maryland 21154-1822 HPVA Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 T P.O. Box 2789 Reston, VA 20195-0789 www.hpva.org IAS International Approval Services (216) 524-4990 U.S. Operations 8501 E. Pleasant Valley Rd. Cleveland, Ohio 44131-5575 www.approvals.org -. ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (800) 284-4406 5360 Workman Mill Road Whittier, California 90601-2298 www.icbo.or ICC International Code Council (703) 931-4533 - 5203 Leesburg Pike #708 Falls Church, VA 22041 Www.inticode.or 03879400 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 8 07/02 — Interior Renovation �3 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (212) 419-7900 3 Park Ave.,I7th Floor New York, NY 10016-5997 Www.ieee.org IES Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 120 Wall Street, 17`h Floor New York, NY 10005 .--, www.iesna.org ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America (812) 275-4426 400 Stone City Bank Building Bedford, IN 47421 www.iliai.com IMIAC International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council (410) 280-1305 International Masonry Institute The James Brice House == 42 East Street F Annapolis, MD 21401 www.in-dweb.org IMSA International Municipal Signal Association (315) 331-2182 - ; PO BOX 539 165 East Union Street Newark, NY 14513-0539 www.imsasafejy.or ISWA Insect Screen Weavers Association KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 1899 Preston White Dr. Reston, VA 20191-5435 www.kcma.oria LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 3335 N. Arlington Heights Rd., Suite E (847) 577-7200 Arlington Heights, IL 60004 www.lightning.org MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 1300 Sumner Ave. Cleveland, OH 44115-2851 www.mbma.com MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association (847) 480-9138 60 Revere Dr., Suite 500 Northbrook, IL 60062 www.maplefloor.or 03879400 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 9 07/02 — Interior Renovation MIA Marble Institute of America (614) 228-6194 30 Eden Alley, Suite 301 Columbus, OH 43215 www.marble-institute.com MIL Military Standardization Documents (215) 697-2179 Defense Automated Printing Service 700 Robbins Ave., Building 4D Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094 www.dodssp.daps.mil ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association (205) 787-2611 P.O. Box 3928 Birmingham, AL 35208 www.naamm.or� MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve (703) 281-6613 and Fittings Industry 127 Park St., NE Vienna, VA 22180-4602 www.mss-hq.com NAA National Arborist Association (800) 733-2622 Route 101, P.O. Box 1094 (603) 673-3311 Amherst, NH 03031-1094 www.natlarb.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 8 South Michigan Ave., Suite 1000 Chicago, IL 60603 www.naamm.org NAAMM North American Association of Mirror Manufacturers (913) 266-7013 (Division of GANA) 2945 Southwest Wanamaker Dr., Suite A Topeka, KS 66614 www.glasswebsite.com NACE NACE International (281) 228-6200 1440 South Creek Drive Houston, TX 77084 www.nace.org NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 44 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 310 Alexandria, VA 22314 www.naima.org 03879400 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 10 07/02 — Interior Renovation a", NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 1220 L. St., NW, Suite 100-167 Washington, DC 20005 www.nbgga.com NBS National Bureau of Standards NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 2302 Horse Pen Rd. Herndon, VA 20171-3499 www.ncma.= NCRP National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (301) 657-2652 7910- Woodmont Ave., Suite 800 Bethesda, MD 20814-3095 www.ncrp.com NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 8575 Grovemont Circle Gaithersburg, MD 20877 www.nebb.org NECA _ National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 3 Bethesda Metro Center, Suite 1100 Bethesda, MD 20814 www.necanet.org NELMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association (207) 829-6901 272 Tuttle Rd. P.O. Box 87A Cumberland Center, ME 04021 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 1300 N 17th St., Suite 1847 Rosslyn, VA 22209 www.nema.orQ NETA International Electrical Testing Association (303) 697-8441 P.O. Box 687 106 Stone St. Morrison, CO 80465 www.netaworld.M NFoPA National Forest Products Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association (800) 344-3555 One Batterymarch Park (617) 770-3000 P.O. Box 9101 Quincy, MA 02269-9101 www.nfpa.or 03879400 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 11 07/02 — Interior Renovation NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-6372 1300 Spring St., Suite 500 Silver Spring, MD 20910 www.nfrc.org NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association NIBS National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800 1090 Vermont Ave., NW, Suite 700 Washington, DC 20005-4905 www.nibs.org NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-4025 100 Bureau Dr., MS 2150 Gaithersburg, MD 20899-2150 www.nist.gov NLA National Lime Association (703) 243-5463 200 North Glebe Rd., Suite 800 Arlington, VA 22203 www.lime.org NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 #406-First Capital Pl. 960 Quayside Dr. New Westminster, BC V3M 6G2 CANADA www.nlga.org NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016 P.O. Box 3009 Memphis, TN 38173-0009 www.nofma.org NPCA National Paint and Coatings Association (202) 462-6272 1500 Rhode Island Ave., NW Washington, DC 20005 www.paint. org NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (847) 299-9070 O'Hare International Center 10255 W. Higgins Rd., Suite 600 Rosemont, IL 60018 www.roofonline.or NSF NSF International (734) 769-8010 P.O. Box 130140 (800) 673-6275 Ann Arbor, MI 48113-0140 www.nsf.or 03879400 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 12 07/02 — Interior Renovation NSPI National Spa and Pool Institute (703) 838-0083 2111 Eisenhower Ave. d Alexandria, VA 22314 www.nspi.org b NSWMA National Solid Wastes Management Association (800)424-2869 Environmental Industry Associations 4301 Connecticut Ave NW, Suite 300 ^^ Washington, DC 20008 www.envasns.org/nswma/Default.htm NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association (800) 323-9736 110 E. Market St., Suite 200-A (703) 779-1022 Leesburg, VA 20176 www.ntma.com NUCA National Utility Contractors Association (703) 358-9300 4301 North Fairfax Dr., Suite 360 ... Arlington, VA 22203-1627 www.nuca.com NWWDA National Wood Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 1400 East Touhy Avenue Suite 470 Des Plaines, IL 60018 www.nwwda.org OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Association (202) 693-1999 + U.S. Department of Labor Office of Public Affairs - Room N3647 200 Constitution Avenue Washington, D.C. 20210 k www.osha-slc.gov PCA Portland Cement Association (847) 966-6200 5420 Old Orchard Rd. Skokie, IL 60077 www.portcement.or PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 209 W. Jackson Blvd. Chicago, IL 60606-6938 www.pci.org PDCA Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (703) 359-0826 3913 Old Lee Hwy, Suite 33-B Fairfax, VA 22030 www.pdca.com 03879400 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 13 07/02 — Interior Renovation PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 45 Bristol Dr. South Easton, MA 02375 http://PDIonline.org PS Product Standard PTI Post Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540 1717 W. Northern Ave., Suite 114 Phoenix, AZ 85021 www.post-tensioning: org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.or� RILEM RILEM Secretariat General 33 147 40 23 97 E N S - Batiment Cournot, 61 avenue du President Wilson F-94235 Cachan Cedex, France www.rilem.or RIS The Redwood Inspection Service (707) 444-3024 630 J Street Eureka, CA 95501 RCSHSB Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association (877) 607-7262 400 Penn Center Blvd., #530 Pittsburgh, PA 15235 www.cypressinfo.org RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association (202) 682-4846 1400 K Street, NW Suite 900 Washington, DC 20005 www.rma.or SCMA Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association (877) 607-7262 400 Penn Center Blvd., #530 Pittsburgh, PA 15235 www.cypressinfo.or SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 462-1930 P.O. Box 25 Fox River Grove, IL 60021 www.sdi.or SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 30200 Detroit Rd. Cleveland, OH 44145-1967 www.steeldoor.or� 03879400 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 14 07/02 — Interior Renovation SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 PO Box 9 r Henderson Harbor, NY 13651 www.sg_cc.or SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 401 N. Michigan Ave. Chicago, IL 60611 ,r www.sigmaonline.org/sigma SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 3127 1 Oth Ave., North Ext. Myrtle Beach, SC 29577-6760 www.steeljoist.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association ` 4201 Lafayette Center Dr. ,.., Chantilly, VA 20151-1209 w-ww.smacna.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (850) 434-2611 4709 Scenic Hwy W_r Pensacola, FL 32504-9094 www.spib.org SPRI Single Ply Roofing Institute (781) 444-0242 200 Reservoir St., 309 A r.. Needham, MA 02494 w www.spn.org SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (800) 837-8303 40 24th St., 6th Floor (412) 281-2331 Pittsburgh, PA 15222-4656 www.sspc.org STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 570 Oakwood Rd. ,-„ Lake Zurich, IL 60047 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 r— 1300 Sumner Ave. Cleveland, OH 44115-2851 www.steelwindows. com SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 2841 Main St. Kansas City, MO 64108 www.swrionline.or 03879400 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 15 ,,, 07/02 — Interior Renovation TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 100 Clemson Research Blvd. Anderson, S.C. 29625 www.tileusa.com TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries (703) 907-7700 Alliance 2500 Wilson Blvd., Suite 300 Arlington, VA 22201 www.tiaonline.or TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 _. 3970 Broadway, Suite 201-D Boulder, CO 80304-1135 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute (608) 833-5900 583 D'Onofrio Dr., Suite 200 Madison, WI 53719 TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873 1855-A Hicks Rd. (847) 705-9898 Rolling Meadows, IL 60008 www.turfgrassod.org UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (847) 272-8800 r. 333 Pfingsten Rd. Northbrook, IL 60062-2096 www.ul.com WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (503) 639-0651 P.O. Box 23145 — Portland, OR 97281 www.wclib.orQ WDMA Window and Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 1400 E. Touhy Ave., Suite 470 Des Plaines, IL 60018 www.nwwda.org WH Intertek Testing Services (905) 678-7820 Warnock Hersey Listing Services _ 3210 American Drive Mississauga, Ontario Canada L4V 1133 www.itsgs.com WIC Woodwork Institute of California (916) 372-9943 3164 Industrial Blvd. West Sacramento, CA 95691 www.wicnet.orp, 01090 - 16 03879400 REFERENCE STANDARDS 07/02 — Interior Renovation WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute (419) 425-9473 W.R.I. Technical Director 301 E. Sandusky Street Findlay, Ohio 45840-0450 www.brij2,ht.net/—wwri WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 522 SW 5th Ave., Suite 500 -� Portland, OR 97204-2122 www.wwpa.org PART2-PRODUCTS .; Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 4r- 03879400 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 17 _ 07/02 — Interior Renovation SECTION 01300 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination. B. Field engineering. C. Preconstruction meeting. D. Site mobilization meeting. E. Progress meetings. F. Preinstallation meetings. G. Cutting and patching. H. Alteration project procedures. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of the Project Manual to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D. In finished areas, except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E. Large Apparatus: Any large piece of apparatus which is to be installed in any space in the building, and which is too large to permit access through windows, doorways or shafts, shall be brought to the job by the Contractor involved and placed in the space before the enclosing structure is completed. F. Items which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location 7. Control devices and details 03879400 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 1 ,., 07/02 — Interior Renovation G. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owner's occupancy. H. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice to Proceed. — B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect, Contractor and major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 2. Distribution of Contract Documents. 3. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, Schedule of Values, and progress schedule. 4. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract and the Architect. 5. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders and Contract closeout procedures. T 6. Scheduling. a. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. b. Owner's requirements and partial occupancy. C. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. d. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. e. Survey and building layout. f. Security and housekeeping procedures. g. Schedules. h. Procedures for testing. i. Procedures for maintaining record documents. ~ j. Requirements for start-up of equipment. k. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. D. Record minutes and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants with two copies to Architect and those affected by decisions made. 1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Owner will schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at minimum bi-monthly intervals. B. Owner will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants and preside at meetings. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, and Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. -- 03879400 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation G2 0 Gi 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work. E. Record minutes, and distribute copies within three days to Architect, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 1.6 PREINSTALLATION MEETING A. When required in individual specification Sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at work site prior to commencing work of the Section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific Section. C. Notify Architect [four] days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting. 1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes, and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants, with three copies to Architect. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Motors: Specific motor type is specified in individual specification sections. B. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box. C. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector for connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual specification sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural attachment of new Work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct location. 03879400 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 3 07102 — Interior Renovation 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply any manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. -- 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching. B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements which affects: 1. Structural integrity of element. 2. Integrity of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant elements. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. 4. Visual qualities of sight -exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. C. Execute cutting, fitting and patching, including excavation and fill, to complete Work and to: 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. 2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming Work. 4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. D. Execute work by methods which will avoid damage to other Work, and provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. F. Restore Work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids. I. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit. J. Identify any hazardous substance or condition exposed during the Work to the Architect for decision or remedy. 3.4 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES A. Materials: As specified in product Sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. Employ skilled and experience installer to perform cutting and patching. C. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. D. Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of restoring products and finishes to original condition unless otherwise specified. E. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. F. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patched work to match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance. G. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and submit recommendation to Architect for review. 03879400 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 4 07/02 — Interior Renovation H. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing a smooth transition for Architect review. I. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections. J. Finish surfaces as specified in individual product Sections. END OF SECTION ram* m.. a; 03879400 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 5 ,., 07/02 — Interior Renovation SECTION 01500 -^ TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS �} PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone service, water, and sanitary facilities. B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing, protection of the Work, and water control. C. Construction Facilities: Access roads, Parking, progress cleaning, project signage, and temporary buildings. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Contract Closeout; final cleaning. 1.4 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Connect to existing power service. Power consumption shall not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. B. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. C. Power Service Characteristics: As indicated on drawings. D. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located as required. Provide flexible power cords as required. E. Provide main service disconnect and overcurrent protection at convenient location in conformance with National Electric Code. F. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. G. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting. 1. Provide 20 ampere duplex outlets, single phase circuits for power tools for every 2000 sq ft of active work area and at specific locations as required. 2. Provide 20 ampere, single phase branch circuits for lighting. 1.5 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of 2 watts/sq ft. B. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. 03879400 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 1 07/02 — Interior Renovation 1.6 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Utilize Owner's existing heat plant, extend and supplement with temporary heat devices as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. C. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. D. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications. 1.7 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. B. Utilize existing fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations. 1.8 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization. 1.9 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Existing designated facilities may be used during construction operations. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. B. At end of construction, return facilities to same or better condition than originally found. 1.10 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to allow for Owner's use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage. 1.11 FENCING A. Construction: At Contractor's option, commercial grade chain link fence or solid wood fence, painted. B. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. 1.12 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary insulated weather -tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification Sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self -closing hardware and locks. 03879400 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation a v 1.13 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as required to separate work areas from Owner occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. B. Construction: Framing and plywood sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces; insulate to R-11 with maximum Flame Spread rating of 75 in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.14 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. 1.15 PARKING A. Existing paved areas may be used for parking. 1.16 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and dispose off -site at intervals as required to maintain clean site. 1.17 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide 8 ft. wide x 4 ft. high project sign of exterior grade plywood and wood frame construction, painted, with exhibit lettering by professional sign painter, to Architect's design and colors. B. List title of project, names of Owner, Architect, Engineer, professional sub -consultants and �--� Contractor. C. Erect on site at location directed by Owner. D. No other signs are allowed without Owner's permission except those required by law. 03879400 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 3 �., 07/02 — Interior Renovation I- 1.18 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary above grade [or buried] utilities, equipment, facilities, and materials as soon as permanent facilities can be utilized. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent -� facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used _ PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03879400 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 4 07/02 - Interior Renovation W SECTION 01600 - ES PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Products. B. Product Delivery, Storage and Handling. C. Product options. D. Substitutions. 1.3 PRODUCTS A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work and does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components. D. Materials required to match existing work and not otherwise specified, shall be equal to the existing work in quality, color and finish. Workmanship and installation shall be comparable to adjacent existing work. The Architect shall be the sole authority in determination of acceptable work. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery 1. Deliver materials, products and equipment to the project site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. 3. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 4. Arrange deliveries in accord with the construction schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation to avoid unnecessary delays in the construction process. B. Storage 1. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. 2. Store sensitive products in weather -tight, climate controlled enclosures. 3. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. I 03879400 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1 ,,,,, 07/02 — Interior Renovation 4. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation or potential degradation of Products. 5. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. 6. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 7. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. 8. Materials, products and equipment may be stored off site in a bonded and insured warehouse approved by the Architect and Owner. Pay all costs incurred for off -site storage facilities. Products properly stored in off -site storage facilities may be included in progress pay requests with written approval of the Architect. C. Handling 1. Handle materials, products and equipment in a manner prescribed by manufacturer or specified to protect from damage during storage and installation. 1.5 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in accordance with the following article. 1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for Substitutions during the bidding period to requirements specified in this Section. B. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents. D. A request constitutes a representation that the Bidder: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with re -approval by authorities. E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. 03879400 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 2 07IO2 — Interior Renovation ..� F. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit four copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed Substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. ;-- 3. The Architect will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request. r^ PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used �., END OF SECTION ra 03879400 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 3 07/02 — Interior Renovation SECTION 01650 STARTING OF SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Starting systems. B. Demonstration and instructions. C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturers field reports. -, B. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services: Manufacturers field reports. C. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: System operation and maintenance data and extra materials. D. Division 15 - Testing Adjusting and Balancing. 1.4 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer's representative and Contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01300 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection. B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season. C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. 03879400 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650 - 1 07/02 — Interior Renovation D. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed -upon times, at equipment location. E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03879400 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation N r SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Closeout procedures. B. Final cleaning. C. Adjusting. D. Project record documents. E. Operation and maintenance data. F. Warranties. G. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Progress cleaning. B. Section 01650 -Starting of Systems: System start-up, testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's inspection. B. Provide submittals to Architect that are required by governing or other authorities. C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. 1.5 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. D. Replace filters of operating equipment. E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. H. Repair, patch and touch-up marred surfaces to match adjacent finishes. I. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if air conditioning units were operated during construction. 03879400 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 1 07/02 — Interior Renovation 1.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Contract Drawings. -- 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. _ 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. C. Record information concurrent with construction progress. D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications. E. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract Drawings. 6. Changes made by addenda and modification. F. Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit one copy 15 days prior to final inspection, 8 '/z x 11 inch text pages, bound in three D-ring binders with durable plastic covers. B. This copy will be returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. C. Submit two final volumes revised within ten days after final inspection. D. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are -' required. E. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. F. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified, type on 24 pound white paper. G. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 03879400 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation H. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: 1. Significant design criteria. 2. List of equipment. 3. Parts list for each component. 4. Operating instructions necessary for Owner to make full and efficient use of equipment including recommended maintenance and seasonal change -over procedures for HVAC systems. 5. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 6. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. I. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: 1. Shop drawings and product data. 2. Air and water balance reports. 3. Certificates. 4. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. 1.9 WARRANTIES A. Provide duplicate notarized copies. B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble with metal prong binder in durable plastic presentation cover. D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 1.10 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification Sections. B. Deliver to project site and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03879400 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 3 ,,. 07/02 — Interior Renovation n SECTION 02072 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING PART 1 - GENERAL Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Construction of temporary barriers. B. Removal of designated building equipment and fixtures. C. Removal of designated construction. D. Disposal of materials. E. Salvage of removed materials. Refer to items as indicated on drawings. F. Storage of removed materials. Refer to items as indicated on drawings. G. Identification of utilities. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Owner's continued occupancy. B. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements. C. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Temporary enclosures, dust control barricades and cleanup during construction. D. Section 01700 — Execution Requirements: Project record documents. P 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Section 01700 — Execution Requirements: Procedures for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities and subsurface obstructions. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for demolition work, dust control and products requiring electrical disconnection and re -connection. B. Obtain required permits from authorities. C. Do not close or obstruct egress width to any building or site exit. D. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without 3 days prior written notice to Owner. E. Conform to procedures applicable when hazardous or contaminated materials are discovered. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas. B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect/Engineer. Do not resume operations until directed. 03879400 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02072 - 1 07/02 — Interior Renovation PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers at locations indicated. B. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings. C. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise to permit continued Owner occupancy. D. Where demolition occurs immediately adjacent to occupied portions of the building, construct dust -proof partitions of minimum 4-inch studs, 5/8-inch drywall (joints taped) on occupied side, 1/2-inch fire -retardant plywood on demolition side. Fill partition cavity with sound -deadening insulation. E. Protect existing materials and equipment which are not to be demolished. F. Provide protective covers over existing carpet, vinyl composition, terrazzo and stairs. G. Provide temporary protective corner protection at all outside corners along route for removal of refuse. H. Do not store nor pile demolition materials nor equipment on any part of the structure in a manner that would cause permanent damage. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide bracing and shoring. J. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. K. Mark location and termination of utilities. Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Architect if shutdown of service is necessary during changeover. L. Provide appropriate temporary signage including signage for exit or building egress. M. Set refuse containers at location approved by Owner. N. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other methods to limit dust and dirt migration. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. O. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, and pollution. 3.2 DEMOLITION A. Disconnect, remove, cap and identify designated utilities within demolition areas. B. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members. C. Flame Cutting: Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as interior of ducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of hidden space before starting flame -cutting operations. Maintain portable fire suppression devices during flame -cutting operations. D. Maintain fire protection services during demolition operations. E. Remove temporary Work. F. Demolish plaster in small sections. Cut plaster at junctures with construction to remain using power -driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power -driven impact tools. I . Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 03879400 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02072 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation -- 2. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities having jurisdiction. �^- G. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. Submit report to Architect in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Architect, rearrange demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay. H. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. 3.3 DISPOSAL A. Coordinate route for movement of refuse within the existing building with the Owner to create the least amount of interference with Owner's continuing occupancy and operations. B. Remove demolished materials from site except where specifically noted otherwise. Do not burn or bury materials on site. C. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted. D. Remove materials as Work progresses. 3.4 SALVAGED MATERIALS A. Salvaged Items: 1. Carefully remove, clean, and deliver to Owner at location as directed by the Owner, the �., items indicated in the Drawings. 2. Carefully remove, clean, store and protect for re -use the items indicated in the Drawings. 3.5 CLEANUP A. Repair damaged pavement and landscaping under refuse containers and return to original condition. B. Repair existing finishes to remain, which are damaged during demolition, to match adjacent finishes. C. Shampoo all soiled carpet along the refuse removal route. Repair or replace carpet along the refuse removal route which has been damaged. Make repairs to satisfaction of Owner. D. Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment, and demolished materials from site. E. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean. F. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start operations. G. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by demolition work. END OF SECTION 03879400 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02072 - 3 ,.,, 07/02 — Interior Renovation SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete masonry units (CMU). B. Mortar. C. Grout for masonry. D. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. B. ASTM A82 - Cold -Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. C. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. D. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. E. ASTM C90 - Load -Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. F. ASTM C 144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. G. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. H. ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. I. ASTM C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry. J. ASTM C476 - Grout for Masonry. K. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Indicate bars sizes, spacings, locations, reinforcement quantities, bending and cutting schedules, supporting and spacing devices for reinforcement and accessories. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 03879400 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 1 .., 07/02 — Interior Renovation 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for requirements for fire rated masonry construction. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 0 13 00. B. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Concrete Masonry Units 1. Featherlite Block Co. B. Portland Cement, Masonry Cement, and Lime — 1. Essroc Materials, Inc. 2. Glen-Gery Corporation. 3. Lafarge Corporation. _ 4. Lehigh Portland Cement Co. 5. Riverton Corporation. C. Joint Reinforcement, Ties, and Anchors 1. Dur-O-Wal, Inc. 2. Heckman Building Products, Inc. 3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 4. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America. 5. National Wire Products Industries. 6. Southern Construction Products. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Hollow Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C90, Type II - Non -moisture Controlled; — normal weight, with integral water-repellent admixture. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE — A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A641 Class 1 after fabrication. B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60 ksi yield grade, deformed billet bars, uncoated finish. C. Reinforcing Steel Positioners: 9 gage steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A641 Class 1 after fabrication. _. 03879400 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation 2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, gray color. B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144, standard masonry type. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. D. Grout Course Aggregate: ASTM C404. E. Water: Clean and potable. F. Bonding Agent: Latex type. 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. Mortar For Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: Portland cement and lime, ASTM C270, Type S, using the Property specification. 2.6 GROUT MIXING A. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout. r- PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.2 3.3 A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work D. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted. PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. C. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces. INSTALLATION A. MORTAR MIXING 1. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities needed for immediate use. 2. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process. 3. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. 4. If water is lost by evaporation, re -temper only within two hours of mixing. 5. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F, or two -and -one-half hours at temperatures under 40 degrees F. B. Coursing 1. General a. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. 03879400 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 3 07/02 — Interior Renovation b. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. 2. Concrete, Masonry Units: a. Bond: Running. b. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. C. Mortar Joints: Flush. C. Placing and Bonding 1. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. - 2. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. 3. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted. 4. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. 5. Interlock intersections and external corners. 6. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. ^ 7. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. 8. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint as indicated. D. Reinforcement and Anchorage - Single Wythe Masonry 1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches oc. 2. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. 3. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. 4. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches oc. 3.4 GROUTED COMPONENTS A. Reinforce bond beam with 2 No. 4 bars, 1 inch from bottom web. B. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters. C. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position. D. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. E. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches either side of opening. 3.5 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints. B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance. 3.6 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, install built-in anchor bolts, plates, and other items to be built-in the work and furnished by other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb and level. C. Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration. 03879400 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 4 07/02 — Interior Renovation 3.7 TOLERANCES �-* A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more. C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non -cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. D. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft. E. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft. F. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch. G. Variation From Joint Width: Plus or minus 1/8 inch and minus 0 inches. H. Maximum Variation from Plane of Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch. e, I. Maximum Variation of Panel from Plane: 1/8 inch. 3.8 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for conduit, sleeves and ducts. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect all masonry work. % 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. F. Do not scratch or deface units. 3.11 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities. C. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners. Provide protection without damaging r^ completed work. 3.12 SCHEDULES A. Interior Partitions: Single wythe concrete block units. r- END OF SECTION 03879400 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 5 r. 07/02 — Interior Renovation n SECTION 06114 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Nailers. B. Blocking in wall. C. Wood furring and grounds. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry openings to receive wood blocking. B. Section 09250 — Gypsum Board: Gypsum board systems. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) - Softwood Lumber Standards. B. ANSI A208.1 - Mat -Formed Wood Particleboard. C. APA/EWA (APA/The Engineered Wood Association) - Certification. D. ASTM A 153 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) of Iron and Steel Hardware. E. ASTM A563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. F. ASTM F568 Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Fasteners. G. AWPA Cl (American Wood Preservers Association) - All Timber Products - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process. H. AWPA C9 Plywood, Pressure Treatment. I. AWPA C20 (American Wood Preservers Association) - Structural Lumber Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. J. AWPA C27 Plywood, Fire -Retardant Pressure Treatment. K. FS FF-N-105B Nails, Brads, Staples and Spikes: Wire, Cut and Wrought. L. SPIB (Southern Pine Inspection Bureau) - Lumber Grading Rules. M. WCLIB (West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau) - Lumber Grading Rules. r" N. NLGA (National Lumber Rules Authority) O. WWPA (Western Wood Products Association). 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies: 1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. 2. Wood Structural Panel Grading Agency: Certified by APA/EWA - The Engineered Wood Association. 3. Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA. 03879400 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06114 - 1 07/02 — Interior Renovation B. Factory grade stamp each piece of lumber and each wood structural panel. In lieu of grade stamping, submit manufacturer's certificate certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect all wood materials from warping or other distortion by stacking in vertical position, braced to resist movement. C. Keep all wood materials covered and dry. Provide air circulation within and around stacks. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General 1. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Nailers and Miscellaneous Framing: Yellow Pine species, No. 2 and better grade, 19 percent maximum moisture content, pressure preservative treat. C. Plywood: APA, Grade C-D; Exposure Durability 1; unsanded. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: ASTM F568 and FS FF-N-105B, Hot dipped or Electro galvanized steel. 2. Decking Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing cadmium plated or zinc coated. 3. Anchors: a. At Metal Studs: Flat or oval head sheet metal screws as required by project conditions. b. At Face Brick: Self tapping masonry anchors equal to Hilti Kwik-Con. C. At Mortar Joints: Expansion type anchors equal to Rawl wedge anchors. d. At Hollow Masonry: Resin injected screen anchors equal to Hilti HIT C20. e. At Grout Filled Masonry and Concrete: Expansion bolts or self tapping masonry anchors as required by project conditions. f. At Drywall: Equal to Hilti Togglers. B. Structural Framing Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions. 2.3 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Shop pressure treat and deliver to site ready for installation, wood materials requiring pressure impregnated preservatives. B. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C 1 using water borne preservative with 0.25 percent retainage. 03879400 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06114 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation EkW r, C. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials, roofing and related metal flashings and other exterior locations. D. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure site -sawn ends are similarly treated. E. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials, roofing and related metal flashings and all other exterior locations. B. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Treat site -sawn ends. D. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Set members level and plumb, in correct position. B. Place horizontal members, crown side up. C. Space framing and furring 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 03879400 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 07/02 — Interior Renovation 114-3 SECTION 06410 .., CUSTOM CASEWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 71 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. r* 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cabinet units. B. Countertops. C. Cabinet hardware. D. Prefinished exposed surfaces. E. Preparation for site finishing concealed surfaces. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS .., A. Section 01400 — Quality Requirements: Testing laboratory services. B. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Grounds and support framing. C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Seals at adjoining construction. D. Section 09900 - Painting: Site finishing of casework. E. Division 16 - Electrical: Power, signal, and data wiring. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. ^^ B. ANSI A161.1 - Countertops. C. ANSI A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard. D. ANSI A208.2 — Medium Density Fiberboard. E. ASTM D 103 7 — Evaluating Properties of Wood -Base Fiber and Particle Panel Materials F. AWI - Quality Standards. G. BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware. H. BHMA A156.11 -Cabinet Locks. I. CID A -A 1936A -Adhesive, Contact. J. HPMA HP - American Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. K. NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. L. NHLA - Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress M. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. N. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawing and Product Data 1. Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. ii 03879400 CUSTOM CASEWORK 06410 - 1 07102 — Interior Renovation 2. For shop drawings submitted in phases, number phases in sequential order and provide master cross reference indicating room number in numerical sequence, millwork elevation and shop drawing sheet where detailed. — 3. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. B. Samples 1. Submit four 2 x 3 inch size samples of each color selected, illustrating counter top and cabinet finish. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform cabinet construction in accordance with AWI custom quality standards and as specified. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect units from moisture damage. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. During and after installation of work of this section, maintain the same temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces as will occur after occupancy. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Water Resistant Particleboard 1. Willamette Industries; Albany, OR. 2. Fiber Resin Industries, Inc.; Oconomowoc, WI. 3. Flakeboard Company; St. Stephen, New Brunswick. 4. Hambro Forest Products; Crescent City, CA. B. Water Resistant Fiberboard 1. Sierra Pine; Martell, CA. 2. Gerogia Pacific; Sault Ste. Marie, Ont. C. Hardware 1. Julius Blum, Inc.; Stanley NC. 2. Grass America, Inc.; Kernersville, NC. 3. Hafele America Co.; Archdale, NC. 4. H.B. Ives; New Haven, CT. 5. Hewi, Inc.; Lancaster, PA. 6. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Co.; Grand Rapids, MI. 7. Liberty Hardware; Greensboro, NC. 8. Stanley Hardware; New Britain, CN. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 03879400 CUSTOM CASEWORK 06410 - 2 07/02 - Interior Renovation WPM, C.a I 2.2 MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; graded in accordance with AWI custom grade, average moisture content of 8 percent. B. Hardwood Lumber: NH -LA; graded in accordance with AWI premium grade; average moisture content of 8 percent. C. Softwood Plywood: PS-1; graded in accordance with AWI, core materials of veneer, lumber or particleboard, type of glue recommended for application; face veneer and cuts D. Hardwood Plywood: HPMA; graded in accordance with AWI, core materials of hardwood veneer, lumber or particleboard; type of glue recommended for application. E. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; Grade M-2 or M-3, composed of wood chips, medium density, with sanded faces. F. Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. G. Thermoset Decorative Overlay Covered Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; Grade M-2 or M-3, composed of wood chips, medium density; surfaced with thermofused melamine. H. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered grade, 1/4 inch thick, smooth one side. I. Thermoset Decorative Overlay Covered Hardboard: ANSI A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered grade, 114 inch thick, smooth one side; surfaced with thermofused melamine. J. Plastic Laminate 1. Conformance: NEMA LD 3. 2. Grade a. Horizontal Exposed Surfaces: GP-50, 0.50 inch thick. b. Vertical Exposed Surfaces: GP-28, 0.28 inch thick. C. Backing Sheet: BK20, 0.20 inch thick backing grade, undecorated plastic laminate. 3. Color, Pattern, and Surface Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line. K. Adhesive: FS MMM-A-130 contact adhesive. Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application. L. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. M. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; Cadmium finish. N. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. O. Shelf Standards 1. Cabinet Mounted: BHMA A156.9, Type B04071, cut for fitted rests spaced at 1 inch centers; chrome satin finish. 2. Wall Mounted: BHMA A156.9, Type B04102, slotted for brackets spaced at 1 inch centers; chrome satin finish. P. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, Type B04081, chrome satin finish. Q. Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, Type B04112, formed steel brackets, chrome satin finish. R. Cabinet Drawer and Door Pulls: Extruded aluminum wire pull, satin finish, equal to Stanley no. 4484. S. Locker and Sliding Door Pulls: Cast nylon, semi -recessed type equal to Hewi no. 535.75. T. Locks 1. Conformance: BHMA A 156.11 2. Style a. Cabinet Drawers and Doors: Type E07261 at all locations. Provide locks with cams not requiring mortising or recessing into cabinet door or drawer front. 03879400 CUSTOM CASEWORK 06410 - 3 07/02 — Interior Renovation P" 3. Finish: Satin chrome steel finish. 4. Keying: Master key all drug storage cabinets to one master key. Master key all other locks to separate master key. Provide two keys per lock. U. Catches: BHMA A156.9, Type B03141. V. Slides 1. Standard Drawers: BHMA A156.9, Type B05051, with positive stop levers. 2. File Drawers: BHMA A156.9, Type B05051 (100 lb. load rated), full extension type with positive stop levers. 3. Cupboard Slides: Equal to Hafele floor mounted pull-out system model no. 421.56.409. with ceiling guide model no. 421.57.406. W. Hinges: Semi -mortised, self closing, three dimensional adjustable type equal to Grass model no. 3604 screw -on hinge with winged base plate; brushed nickel finish. 2.3 FINISHING MATERIALS A. Finishing: Site finish of casework scheduled to receive opaque and transparent finishes specified in Section 09900. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General 1. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. 2. Fit shelves, doors, drawer fronts and other exposed and semi -exposed edges with veneer matching face finish as scheduled. Use one piece for full length only. 3. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. 4. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. 5. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. 6. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. 7. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic wood laminate finished surfaces. 8. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on -site dimensions. Seal cut edges. 9. If veneer core plywood drawer sides, backs, and subfronts are used, assemble using dovetail or French dovetail construction. 10. Fabricate drawers with bottoms set into sides, back, and front 1/4 inch. B. Laminated Plastic -Covered Casework 1. Fabricate in accordance with AWI Section 1600, reveal overlay style, using the following materials: a. Body Members: Melamine covered particleboard. b. Stiles and Rails: Poplar, Alder or medium density particleboard. C. Shelves: Medium density particleboard. d. Backs: Tempered hardboard. e. Drawer Sides, Backs and Subfronts: Poplar, Alder or other solid wood. f. Drawer Bottoms: Tempered hardboard or thermoset decorative overlay covered hardboard. g. Drawer Fronts: Medium density particleboard or fiberboard. h. Doors: Medium density particleboard or fiberboard. 03879400 CUSTOM CASEWORK 06410 - 4 07/02 — Interior Renovation I C. Transparent Finish Casework 1. Fabricate in accordance with AWI Section 1600, reveal overlay style, using the following materials: a. Body Members 1) Exposed: Plain sliced red oak veneer on plywood core. 2) Semi -exposed: Particleboard or thermoset decorative overlay covered particleboard. b. Stiles and Rails: Plain sawn red oak. C. Shelves 1) Exposed: Plain sliced red oak veneer on plywood core. 2) Semi -exposed: Rotary cut red oak veneer on particleboard core. Thermoset decorative overlay covered particleboard. d. Backs 1) Exposed: Plain sliced red oak veneer on plywood core. 2) Semi -exposed: Thermoset decorative overlay covered hardboard. e. Drawer Sides, Backs and Subfronts: Poplar, Alder or 7 ply veneer core plywood. f. Drawer Bottoms: Tempered hardboard or thermoset decorative overlay covered hardboard. g. Drawer Fronts: Plain sliced red oak veneer on plywood core. h. Doors: Plain sliced red oak veneer on plywood core. i. Door, Drawer and Shelf Edging: Veneer banding to match door and drawer faces. D. Countertops 1. Conformance: Fabricate in accordance with AWI Section 400C. 2. Exposed Finish: GP-50 high pressure decorative laminate 3. Core a. Countertops Without Sinks: Particleboard or fiberboard. 4. Backing Sheet: BK-20. 5. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. 6. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops. 2.5 FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Finish for items scheduled to receive transparent or opaque finishes, specified in Section 09900 - Painting PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. C. Verify location and sizes of utility rough -in associated with work of this section. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install casework and associated trim in accordance with AWI Section 1700. B. Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level. C. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. 03879400 CUSTOM CASEWORK 07/02 — Interior Renovation ,1 • M 1M, D. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and counter tops. E. Seal splashes and returns to countertop and wall with type sealant specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealants. F. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. G. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. H. Anchorage Devices 1. General: Use concealed anchorage devices at all locations except where otherwise approved by Architect. 2. Transparent or Opaque Finish Casework a. At exposed fixed locations, countersink and putty or countersink and conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. b. At exposed locations requiring removable panels, provide brass screws and countersunk finishing washers. 3. Laminated Plastic -Covered Casework a. At exposed fixed locations, provide cadmium coated screws with countersunk finishing washers. b. At exposed locations requiring removable panels, provide brass screws and countersunk finishing washers. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test substrate at countertops with sinks in conformance with ASTM D1037. B. Provide 2 pieces of substrate to testing laboratory, 12 x 12 inch in size taken from sink cutouts. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust installed work in accordance with Section 01700 -Contract Closeout. B. Test installed work for rigidity and ability to support loads. C. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean installed work in accordance with Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. END OF SECTION 03879400 CUSTOM CASEWORK 06410 - 6 07/02 — Interior Renovation SECTION 06610 GLASS -FIBER -REINFORCED PLASTIC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass fiber reinforced (FRP) Panels. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 — Wood Blocking and Curbing. B. Section 07900 — Joint Sealers. C. Section 09250 — Gypsum Board Systems. D. Section 09650 — Resilient Flooring and Base. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 — Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, adjacent construction, materials, thicknesses, fabrication details, required clearances, field jointing, tolerances, colors, finishes, methods of support, integration of plumbing and electrical components, and anchorages. C. Product Data: Submit data on specified component products. D. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating color, texture, and finish. E. Submit maintenance data and recommended cleaning and stain removal methods and cleaners required. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 03879400 GLASS -FIBER -REINFORCED PLASTIC 07/02 — Interior Renovation 06610 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS FIBER AND RESIN FABRICATIONS A. Fabricators: 1. Marlite, Dover, Ohio. - 2. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Fiberglass reinforced plastic panel, equal to Marlite, P 140 Ivory, 4' x 8' panels. B. Furnish all connectors, mouldings and trim pieces necessary for complete installation. C. Adhesives: as recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate openings under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify substrate is ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Securely attach panels to drywall with anchors and adhesives in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. B. Layout panels so that no panel will be less than 24" wide. C. Installation shall meet USDA specifications, producing an installation that can be easily cleaned to a sanitary condition. D. All panel trim shall terminate at top of scheduled base and at ceiling grid. E. Joints shall not be closer than 2 inches from cover plates for outlets, strobes, switches, etc. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation from Indicated Position: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Offset from Alignment Adjacent Components: 1/8 inch. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean components of foreign material without damaging finished surface. END OF SECTION 03879400 GLASS -FIBER -REINFORCED PLASTIC 06610 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation k SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL - 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Uniform General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES y A. Acoustical insulation. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Acoustical insulation. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. B. ASTM E 84-87 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. ASTM E 90-87 Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building - Partitions. D. ASTM E96 - Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. E. ASTM E 119-83 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. F. ASTM E 413-87 Determination of Sound Transmission Class. G. NFPA 255 - Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. H. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code as indicated on drawings for combustibility and smoke development requirements for materials as follows: r� 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. B. Identify insulation with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria and limitations. B. Manufacturer's Certificate 1. Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 03879400 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1 ;,�, 07/02 — Interior Renovation 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet or soiled. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Flexible Insulation 1. Owens/Coming Corporation 2. CertainTeed 3. Manville Corp. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600 2.2 MATERIALS A. Flexible Acoustical Insulation 1. Conformance: ASTM C 665, Type I, glass or mineral fiber batt. 2. Thermal Resistance: R8. 3. Size: To fit framing spacing. 4. Facing: Unfaced. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate and adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation. B. Verify insulation is dry. C. Verify substrate surface is flat and free of irregularities. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General - 1. Install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install insulation without gaps or voids. 3. Place insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. - 4. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. B. Flexible Acoustical Insulation 1. Place between and tight to framing members. 03879400 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Flexible Acoustical Insulation 1. Walls: Install in stud space from floor to top of wall or from floor to bottom of roof deck above where indicated on floor plan. END OF SECTION 03879400 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3 07/02 — Interior Renovation SECTION 07900 v JOINT SEALERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces. B. Sealant and backing. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08110 — Steel Doors and Frames: Sealants used in conjunction with steel frames. B. Section 08700 — Hardware: Sealants used in conjunction with hardware. C. Section 08800 - Glazing: Sealants used in conjunction with glazing methods. D. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Sealants used in conjunction with sound rated partitions. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AAMA 803.3 - Voluntary Specification for Narrow -Joint Seam Sealer. r� B. AAMA 808.3 - Voluntary Specification for Exterior Perimeter Sealing Compound w-, C. ASTM C719 -.Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Under Cyclic Movement. D. ASTM C792 -"Effects of Heat Aging on Weight Loss, Cracking, and Chalking of Elastomeric Sealants. E. ASTM C570 - Oil and Resin - Base Caulking Compound for Building Construction. F. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds. !, G. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. H. ASTM C 1311 - Solvent Release Sealants. I. ASTM C 1193 - Use of Joint Sealants. ,. J. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. K. ASTM D1667 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Closed -Cell Foam). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations and color availability. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. 03879400 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 1 07/02 — Interior Renovation B. Samples 1. Submit four sample kits in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. C. Mockup 1. Construct field sample panel illustrating sealant type, color, and tooled surface. 2. Locate where directed. 3. Accepted sample may not remain as part of the Work. D. Certificates 1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements and are suitable for use indicated. 2. Joint sealant manufacturer's certification that sealants, primers, and cleaners required for _ sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum five years documented experience. C. Conform to ASTM C1193 requirements for materials and installation. 1. Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. 2. Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. D. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements 1. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces. 2. Do not install sealants when joint substrates are wet. 3. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 03879400 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation W 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with all Sections referencing this Section. 1.10 WARRANTY om A. Provide five year warranty. B. Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A 2.1 MATERIALS A. Elastomeric Sealants 1. General: Manufacturer's standard chemically curing, urethane, polyurethane, or polysulfide polymer based elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C 920. 2. Types a. S-1: Type M, Grade P, Class 25. b. S-2: Type S, Grade P, Class 25. C. S-3: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. d. S-4: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 4. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. B. Latex Sealants 1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, mildew -resistant, paintable latex sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation without failing either adhesively or cohesively. 2. Types a. S-5; Acrylic -Emulsion Sealant 1) Composition: Manufacturer's standard product accommodating joint movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 10 percent. 2) Conformance: ASTM C 834 b. S-6; Silicone Emulsion Sealant 1) Composition: Manufacturer's standard product that accommodates joint movement of not more than 25 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 50 percent. 2) Conformance: ASTM C 834 and, except for weight loss measured per ASTM C 792, ASTM C 920. 3) Special Properties: Fungus and mildew resistant. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 4. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. C. Type S-7; Acrylic Sealant 1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, solvent -release -curing acrylic terpolymer sealant complying with AAMA 808.3, with capability to withstand 15 percent maximum cyclic movement (7-1/2 percent movement in both extension and 03879400 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 3 07/02 — Interior Renovation compression) at time of application and remain adhered to joint substrates indicated for Project without failing cohesively when tested for adhesion and cohesion per ASTM C 719. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. D. Type S-8; Butyl Sealant 1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, nonstaining, paintable, solvent -release -curing, polymerized butyl sealant formulated with minimum of 75 percent solids and tack -free time of 24 hours or less, complying with ASTM C 1311. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. E. Type S-9; Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant 1. General: Manufacturer's standard, solvent -release -curing, pigmented synthetic rubber sealant formulated for sealing joints 3/16 inch or smaller in width, complying with AAMA 803.3 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. F. Accessories 1. Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 2. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. 3. Joint Backing: ANSFASTM D1056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. 4. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 5. Masking Tape: Non -staining, non -absorbing type as recommended by sealant manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions and substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C1193. E. Install masking tape where required to protect adjacent finished surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/2 the joint width. 03879400 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 4 07/02 — Interior Renovation e- ri: D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Remove and replace joint backing which has become wet, dirty, or exposed to weather for extended period of time. F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. H. Tool joints concave in accordance with ASTM C1193 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section. C. Cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants and repair so that repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Interior Joints 1. Horizontal traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1, or S-2. 2. Horizontal non -traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1, S-2, S-3, or S-4. 3. Vertical or inclined joints such as panel, coping and control: Sealant types S-3, S-4. 4. Vertical or inclined joints such as perimeters of doors, windows, wall penetrations: Sealant types S-3, S-4 or S-6. 5. Non-structural hollow metal doors and borrowed lites. Sealant types S-3, S-4 S-5, S-6 or S-7. 6. Non-structural perimeter seals around plumbing fixtures, joints between ceramic the and joints between ceramic tile and dissimilar materials: Sealant type S-6. 7. Non-structural perimeter seals at joints between countertops, backsplashes and walls: Sealant type S-7. END OF SECTION 03879400 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 5 07/02 — Interior Renovation SECTION 08000 DOOR SCHEDULE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1-General Requirements apply to work of this section 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Door Schedule 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames B. Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors C. Section 08700 Hardware 1.4 GENERAL A. This section covers only the doors, frames and hardware as they relate to this project. Requirements for quality and method of installation are covered in other appropriate section of the specifications or in the drawings. Refer to the drawings for locations required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DOOR SCHEDULE A. The DOOR SCHEDULE lists door sizes, types, construction, frame sizes, types, detail locations on drawings, hardware sets and other remarks. 2.2 DOORS A. Door types, references by letter designation in the DOOR SCHEDULE, are located in the drawing set. 2.3 REMARKS A. Door schedule remarks. 1. Label (Fire Resistive Rating) a. L 1 = 20 minute. b. L3 = 90 minute. 2. Remarks a. R1 = Cased opening. b. R2 = Dutch door, cut new hinges into existing frame. 03879400 DOOR SCHEDULE 08000 - 1 07/02 — Interior Renovation C. R3 = Field verify height from new floor level to existing lintel before manufacturing this door. d. R4 = New counter door to fit in existing opening. Verify opening size prior to counter door manufacturing. B. Door Schedule: See attached. PART 3-EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) END OF SECTION 03879400 DOOR SCHEDULE 08000 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation i l PART 1 - GENERAL /ei->.... 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Standard non -rated and fire rated steel doors and frames. B. Repair and modification of existing frames and doors. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors. B. Section 08700 - Hardware. C. Section 09250 - Gypsum Drywall: Prepared openings. D. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of doors and frames; bituminous coating of frames in contact with cementitious materials. G } 1.4 REFERENCES A. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board - 36 CFR Part 1191, Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. B. ANSI A250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. C. ANSI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors and Hardware Reinforcings. D. ANSI- A250.7 - Hardware on Standard Steel Doors (Reinforcement --Application). E. ANSI A250.8/SDI-100 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors & Frames. F. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. G. ASTM A366 - Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold -Rolled, Commercial Quality. e ' H. ASTM A568 — Carbon and High -Strength Low -Alloy, Hot -Rolled and Cold -Rolled, General 4 Requirements. I. ASTM A569 — Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality. J. ASTM A591 — Steel, Sheet, Electrolytic, Zinc -Coated, for Light Coating Mass Applications. K. ASTM A620 — Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold -Rolled, Drawing Quality, Special Killed. L. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. M. ASTM A366 - Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold -Rolled, Commercial Quality. N. ASTM A924 — Steel Sheet, Metallic -Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. O. SDI-112 — Zinc -Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 03879400 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 1 07/02 — Interior Renovation P. SDI-113 — Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal Transmittance of Steel Door and Frame Assemblies. Q. SDI-117 — Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames. R. SDI-128 — Guidelines for Acoustical Performance Standard Steel Doors and Frames. S. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. T. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements 1. Conform to requirements of 36 CFR Part 1191 and Texas Accessibility Standards. 2. Conform to NFPA 80 and NFPA 252 for fire rated class indicated B. Manufacturer 1. Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Indicate each type door and frame elevation, reinforcements, hardware locations, metal types and gauges, fire rating and finish. Use same numbering system as indicated on drawings. 2. Indicate frame configuration, anchor spacings and anchor types. 3. Indicate door core construction and door head and door sill closure method. 4. Manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. B. Certificates 1. Manufacturer's Certificate certifying that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Provide frames with manufacturer's standard sill spreader bar for all welded units. B. Protect doors and frames with manufacturer's standard resilient packaging. C. Break seal on -site to permit ventilation. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's five year warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Interior Doors and Frames 1. Stretcher level steel conforming to ASTM A366 and ASTM A568. B. Exterior Doors and Frames 1. Stretcher level steel conforming to ASTM A366 and ASTM A568. 2. Stretcher level steel conforming to ASTM A924 and ASTM A653 at locations indicated on DOOR SCHEDULE. 03879400 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation C. Protective Coatings 1. Bituminous Coating: Specified in Section 09900 - Painting. -- 2. Primer. Manufacturer's standard oven dried, gray alkyd enamel primer, complying with requirements of ANSI A250.10. D. Accessories 1. Jamb Anchors a. Masonry Construction: 'T'-strap type, corrugated and galvanized. b. Concrete Construction: Expansion shield and flat head machine screw complying with fire rated assembly. C. Steel Stud Construction: Z type, same gage and material as frame. 2. Silencers: As specified in Section 08700 - Hardware. 2.2 FABRICATION A. General 1. Fabricate doors and frames to sizes and profiles indicated and in conformance with, except as otherwise specified, ANSI A250.3, ANSI A250.4, ANSI A250.8, ANSI A250.10 and SDI-113 for non -rated assemblies and NFPA 80 and NFPA 252 for rated assemblies. 2. Fabricate doors and frames with hardware reinforcements in accordance with Table 4 of ANSI A250.8. Weld all hardware reinforcement plates in place. 3. Attach fire rated label to each frame and door unit. 4. Grind all welds smooth, fill all voids with body putty and seam filler and sand smooth. Welds and joints shall not be visible. B. Doors 1. Exterior doors: Level 3, Model 2. 2. Interior doors: Level 2, Model 2, STC 38 where scheduled. 3. Close top edge of doors with flush steel channel closure. Seal joints watertight. 4. Close bottom edge of doors with inverted steel channel closure. 5. Door Edges: Beveled. 6. Core Construction, Exterior Doors a. Vertical steel stiffeners formed from not less than 6 inches gage steel, spaced not more than 6 inches apart, and securely attached to face sheets by spot welds, not more than 6 inches on center. b. Fill spaces between stiffeners full height of door with a minimum 0.6 pound density mineral fiber insulation. C. Thermal Value: Total insulation R-Value of 44, measured in accordance with ASTM C236. 7. Core Construction, Interior Doors a. Vertical steel stiffeners formed from not less than 20 gage steel, spaced not more t than 6 inches apart, and securely attached to face sheets by spot welds, not more than 6 inches on center. 8. Core Construction, Fire Rated Interior Doors a. Conform to requirements of NFPA 252. 9. Core Construction, Sound Rated Doors - a. Conform to requirements of ASTM E413 with an STC of 32. r C. Frames 1. Exterior Non -Security Frames: Level 3, 14 gage. 2. Interior Non -Security Frames: Level 2, 16 gage, STC 38 where scheduled. 3. Except where otherwise scheduled, fabricate and assemble as complete welded unit. a 03879400 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3 ;i 07/02 — Interior Renovation A 4. Weld Z anchors to frame. 5. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. -' 6. Prepare interior frame for silencers except where scheduled to receive sound seals or weatherstripping. Provide for three single silencers on strike side of single doors and two single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions. —� 7. Provide minimum 14 gage steel floor angle clips welded to each jamb. 2.3 FINISH B. Finish: As Specified in SECTION - 09900. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install frames in accordance with ANSI A250.11 and manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Coordinate with masonry and gypsum wallboard wall construction for anchor placement. 3. Coat inside of frame profile with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1/16 inch where in direct contact with masonry and concrete. 4. In masonry openings, provide an adjustable T-strap anchor at each hinge location and at same location in strike jamb. 5. Install field applied hardware in accordance with SDI-109. 6. Touch-up damaged shop finishes. 3.2 REPAIR OF EXISTING FRAMES AND DOORS 1. Install frame and door manufacturer's standard filler plates at abandoned hinge and strike mortises. a. Weld in place and grind smooth with invisible edges. 2. Fill abandoned screw holes in frame and door with body putty. Sand smooth with feathered, invisible edges. 3. New hardware reinforcements a. Make cut-outs in frame with straight lines and square corners. b. Maintain maximum 1/16 inch between edge of new cut-out and new hardware. C. Provide hardware reinforcements to comply with requirements of referenced standards. d. Weld reinforcements in place and grind smooth with invisible edges. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. 03879400 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 4 07/02 — Interior Renovation r 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Door Schedule 08000. END OF SECTION FE 03879400 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 5 ,,, 07/02 — Interior Renovation r SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non -rated and fire rated flush wood doors to receive paint finish. t' 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Steel doors and frames. B. Section 08700 - Door Hardware. C. Section 09900 - Painting: Site finishing doors. 1.4 REFERENCES r, A. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. B. ANSI/HPMA HP - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. C. ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. ASTM E413 - Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class. E. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. F. NFPA 252 - Standard Method of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. G. NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association. H. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. I. Warnock -Hersey - Certification Listings for fire doors. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required and special blocking for hardware. 2. Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics; factory machining criteria. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions 1. Indicate special installation instructions. D. Manufacturer's Certificates 1. Certify that doors meet or exceed specified requirements and requirements of NWWDA _ standards referenced. 2. Certify that doors meet or exceed adhesive bond test of NWWDA T.M.-6. Em 03879400 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1 _:, 07/02 — Interior Renovation 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with NWWDA Industry Standard I.S. 1-A for Flush Wood Doors. 'A 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Door Construction: Conform to NFPA 252. B. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as scheduled. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect doors with manufacturer's standard sealed resilient packaging. C. Handle doors with clean hands or while wearing clean gloves. D. Store doors in flat position, raised above floor, not in damp or wet areas or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. E. Seal top and bottom edges if stored more than one week. Break seal on -site to permit ventilation. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as on shop drawings. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 0 103 9. B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01700 to the following term: 1. Exterior Doors: Life of Installation. 2. Interior Doors: Life of Installation. B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials and telegraphing core construction. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Doors 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.; Algoma, WI. 2. Eggers Industries, Inc.; Two Rivers, WI. 03879400 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation r.:, N 3. VT Industries, Inc.; Holstein, IA. 4. Weyerhaeuser; Marshfield, WI. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Lumber 1. Paint Finish: NHLA first grade, Birch, kiln dried to maximum 10 percent moisture content. B. Cores 1. Solid Core a. Non -Fire Rated: ANSI 208.1, grade 1-LD2 particleboard, minimum 40 pounds per cubic foot density. b. Fire Rated 1) 20 and 30 Minute Rated: ANSI 208.1, LD2 fire retardant treated particleboard, minimum 40 pounds per cubic foot density. 2) 3/4 and 1 1/2 Hour Rated: Manufacturer's standard mineral core. C. Veneers 1. Paint Finish: B grade Birch. D. Adhesives 1. Exterior Doors: Type II - water resistant. 2. Interior Doors: Type II - water resistant. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General 1. Fabricate fire rated doors to meet fire ratings scheduled in accordance with ASTM E84 classifications for flame spread/smoke developed of 20/45. Attach fire rating label to door edge. 2. Fabricate doors to thickness scheduled. 3. At exterior doors, provide aluminum flashing at the top and bottom rail and the sill of glazed openings for full thickness and width of door. 4. Hardware a. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with templates furnished by hardware supplier at locations indicated in NWWDA I.S.1.7-87 - Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors. b. Do not machine for surface hardware. C. Provide solid blocking for through bolted hardware. d. Cut and configure exterior door edge to receive recessed weather stripping devices. 5. Factory pre -fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings with prefit clearances specified in NWWDA I.S. 1-A. B. Flush Face Doors 1. Solid Core: Fabricate in accordance with NWWDA I.S. 1 and 1-A for 7 ply construction except as otherwise specified, with finish as scheduled. 2. Bonding a. Wood Cores: Type A - bonded. 03879400 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 07/02 — Interior Renovation 08211 - 3 2.4 FINISH A. As specified in Section 09900 - PAINTING. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify frame opening conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out -of -tolerance for size or alignment. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Trim non -rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch. Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating requirements. D. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes. E. Machine cut for hardware. Core for handsets and cylinders. F. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08110 and hardware specified in Section 08700. G. Install door louvers, plumb and level. L 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Conform to NWWDA I.S. 1-A requirements for fit and clearance tolerances, maximum diagonal distortion, telegraphing and warp. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION 03879400 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 4 07/02 — Interior Renovation SECTION 08700 HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. All finish hardware necessary for completion of project. Awt 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 06410 - Custom Casework: Casework Hardware. B. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames C. Section 08113 - Steel Frames +• D. Section 08210 - Wood Doors E. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors F. Section 08331 - Overhead Coiling Doors: Hardware for same except cylinders G. Section 08360 - Sectional Overhead Doors: Hardware for same except cylinders H. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Hardware for same except cylinders I. Section 16721 - Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System: Electrical connection to activate door closers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications 1. Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum three years experience. B. Regulatory Requirements 1. Fire Door Hardware a. Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 and 101 for doors shown, scheduled, or specified to be in a fire rated wall or to receive a UL-label. b. In case of conflict between hardware specified and NFPA requirements, provide type required by NFPA. r C. Provide door hardware listed by UL or Warnock Hersey or other testing laboratory approved by code authority having jurisdiction. d. Provide hardware tested in accordance with NFPA 252. ` 1.5 REFERENCES A. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURER'S ASSOCIATION (NEMA LB3-1995) H - Performance Standards for High Pressure Decorative Laminate. 03879400 HARDWARE 08700 - 1 r 07/02 — Interior Renovation B. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) 1. ANSI A117 Building and Facilities - Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People. 2. ANSI A156.1 Butts and Hinges. 3. ANSI A156.2 Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches. 4. ANSI A156.3 Exit Devices. 5. ANSI A156.4 Door Controls - Closers. 6. ANSI A156.5 Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products. 7. ANSI A156.6 Architectural Door Trim. 8. ANSI A156.7 Template Hinge Dimensions. 9. ANSI A156.8 Door Controls - Overhead Holders. 10. ANSI A156.12 Interconnected Locks & Latches. 11. ANSI A156.13 Mortise Locks & Latches. 12. ANSI A156.15 Closer Holder Release Devices. 13. ANSI A156.16 Auxiliary Hardware. 14. ANSI A156.17 Self -Closing Hinges and Pivots. 15. ANSI A156.18 Materials and Finishes. 16. ANSI A156.21 Thresholds 17. ANSI A156.23 Electromagnetic Locks 18. ANSI A156.24 Delayed Egress Locks C. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING & MATERIALS (ASTM) 1. ASTM F883 Padlocks. D. BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA) 1. BHMA Directory of Certified Locks & Latches. 2. BHMA Directory of Certified Door Closers. r 3. BHMA Directory of Certified Exit Devices. E. CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR) 1. 36CFR Part 1191 - Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) F. DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTITUTE (DHI) 1. DHI-02 Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware. 2. DHI-03 Keying Systems and Nomenclature. 3. DHI-04 Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Door and Frames. 4. DHI-05 Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 5. DHI A115 Wood Door Preparation Standards G. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) 1. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows. 2. NFPA 101 Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. 3. NFPA 105 Installation of Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies. H. STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE 1. SDI-107 Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement and Application). I. Texas Civil Statutes, Article 9102, Architectural Barriers Act, Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) -- 1. TAS 4.13.8 Door Thresholds 2. TAS 4.13.9 Door Hardware 3. TAS 4.13.10 Door Closers J. UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES, INC. 1. Building Materials Directory. 03879400 HARDWARE 08700 - 2 07/02 - Interior Renovation A- 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide product data on specified hardware. 2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists, templates, and installation instructions. 3. Provide wiring diagrams, electrical characteristics, and product data on all electrically controlled devices. B. Hardware Schedule 1. Include for each item: Quantities; manufacturer's name and catalog numbers; sizes; detail information or catalog cuts; finishes; door and frame size and materials; location and hardware set identification using same opening numbers as indicated on the drawings; lock trim material thicknesses; lock trim material evaluation test results; corresponding ANSU BHMA standard type number or function number from manufacturer's catalog if not covered by ANSI/ BHMA; and list of abbreviations. 2. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. 3. Indicate lock side of single cylinder doors. 4. Include master cross-reference list indicating door numbers in numerical sequence and associated hardware set. a. If, for any reason, any door is moved from the set indicated in the schedule at the end of this section, provide a master cross-reference list in numerical sequence indicating door number_, original hardware set and new hardware set for every opening. C. Keying Schedule 1. Hold a keying conference with the Owner or Owner's representative to develop a keying schedule. 2. Develop schedule in accordance with DHI-03. 3. Obtain keying system approval before delivering hardware to project. 4. Unless otherwise indicated or requested, provide keying as follows: a. Key all doors different and key all doors to the same room alike. b. Key all exterior doors alike. C. Master key all doors except mechanical room doors to one key. d. Key mechanical room doors to existing utilities master key system. D. Certificates of Compliance 1. Submit certificates of compliance attesting that hardware items conform to the NFPA, CFR and ANSU BHMA standards specified. In lieu of certificates, submit statement that proposed hardware items appear in current BHMA directories of certified products. 2. Fire Rated Doors: Submit certificates of compliance, attesting that doors which are indicated, scheduled, or specified to be fire rated are fitted with the required hardware (i.e. active latch bolts, self -closing devices) and operate in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 80 and 101. Identify all such doors on certificates. E. Closeout Submittals 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01700. 2. Provide list of actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key code. 3. Submit data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements adjustment methods and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. 4. Furnish spare parts data, including a complete list of parts and supplies and source of supply, for locksets, exit devices, closers, electronic locking devices and electro-magnetic closer holder release devices. 5. Submit special tools required for hardware adjustment or control. 03879400 HARDWARE 08700 - 3 07/02 — Interior Renovation 6. Maintenance Instructions: Furnish 6 complete copies of maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and trouble shooting guides. 7. Submit simplified "as installed" diagrams for electronic locking devices and electromagnetic closer holder release devices. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle hardware to site in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. B. Individually package each article of hardware in manufacturer's standard commercial carton or container, and properly mark or label to be readily identifiable with approved hardware schedule. C. Tag or otherwise identify each change key with door for which its cylinder is intended. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate requirements for hardware to be mounted on metal doors or metal frames between hardware manufacturer and door or frame manufacturer to establish location, reinforcement required, size of holes, and similar details. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty for door closers. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIAL A. Blank keys: Provide one for each lock scheduled. B. Provide 10 extra cylinder cores for each master key group. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ra A. Hinges " 1. Bommer; Landrum, SC 2. Hager Hinge Co.; St. Louis, MO 3. McKinney Manufacturing Co.; Scranton, PA 4. Stanley Hardware Division, Stanley Works; New Britain, CT B. Lock and Latches 1. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; City of Industry, CA 2. Best Lock Corporation; Indianapolis, IN 3. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware; Berlin, CT 4. PDQ Industries, Inc.; Leola, PA 5. Sargent Division, ESSEX Industries, Inc.; New Haven, CT 6. Schlage Lock Co.; San Francisco, CA C. Push/Pulls 1. Elmes Door Hardware, Teramura International Corporation; Torrance, CA. 2. Rockwood Manufacturing Co.; Rockwood, PA 3. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA f- 03879400 HARDWARE 08700 - 4 07/02 - Interior Renovation D. Electromagnetic Locks 1. Adams Rite; Pomona, CA ,�. 2. Loknetics Security Engineering; Forestville, CT 3. Von Duprin, Inc.; Indianapolis, IN E. Exit Devices 1. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware; Berlin, CT 2. Norton Door Controls; Charlotte, NC 3. Sargent Division ESSEX Industries Inc.; New Haven, CT 4. Von Duprin, Inc.; Indianapolis, IN F. Closers 1. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware; Berlin, CT 2. LCN Closers Division, Schlage Lock Co.; Princeton, IL 3. Norton Door Controls; Charlotte, NC G. Overhead Holders 1. Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN 2. Rixson Architectural Hardware; Charlotte, NC H. Manual and Automatic Bolts 1. Door Controls International (DCI); Dexter, MI 2. Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN 3. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co; Wallingford, CT 4. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA . 1. Gasketing/Threshholds 1. Hager Companies; St. Louis, MO 2. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; Memphis, TN r, 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc.; Rosemount, MO 4. Zero International, Inc.; Bronx, NY J. Protection Plates 1. Hager Companies; St. Louis, MO 2. Ralph Wilson Plastics Co.; Temple, TX 3. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA K. Door Stops/Bumpers 1. Elmes Door Hardware, Teramura International Corporation; Torrance, CA. 2. Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN 3. Hager Companies; St. Louis, MO 4. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co.; Wallingford, CT 5. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA L. Door Silencers 1. Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN 2. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co.; Wallingford, CT 3. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA r• M. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. General 1. Provide hardware components as indicated in paragraph HARDWARE SCHEDULE at the end of this section. 2. Schedule is based on products manufactured by Schlage, LCN, Hager, Pemko and - Von Duprin. Components of other manufacturers will be acceptable provided they 03879400 HARDWARE 08700 - 5 07/02 - Interior Renovation comply with the ANSI/BHMA standards for Grade 1 products and are listed in the latest edition of the BHMA Directories of certification. 3. Regardless of whether or not the HARDWARE SCHEDULE at the end of this section has every door and every component scheduled for each opening, provide all components required to make every opening functional based on hardware scheduled for similar openings and the referenced codes. B. Exit Devices and Exit Device Accessories 1. General a. Provide dust proof floor strikes for vertical rod devices. b. Provide manufacturer's standard filler to extend exit device beyond door lite frames where door lites extend below exit device. Factory cut or form filler to match profile of exit device trim. C. Closers 1. Closers for outswinging exterior doors: Size one size larger than manufacturer's published recommendations, but not less than size 5. 2. Size requirements for other closers: Conform to manufacturer's published recommendations, except as specified otherwise. 3. Closers for outswinging exterior doors: Provide parallel arms or top jam mount closers for outswinging exterior doors. -- 4. Provide narrow projection closers for doors close to a wall so as not to strike wall at 90-degree open position. 5. Operating Pressure: Provide closers with maximum operating pressure as follows: a. Interior Doors: Set closing force on doors accessible to the physically handicapped for a push-pull of 5 pounds applied at knob or handle. b. Exterior Doors: Maximum 8.5 pounds.. C. Fire Rated Doors: Set to minimum required to relatch door. D. Protection Plates 1. Conformance: ANSI A156.6, category J100. 2. Fabrication a. Metal Plates 1) Fabricate from 0.050 inch thick stainless steel. 2) Bevel all edges. 3) Countersink screw holes for flat head screws. 3. Size a. Width: 2 inches less in width than door width for single doors and 1 inch less for pairs of doors. b. Height 1) Kick Plates: 10 inches except where bottom rail is less than 10 inches, extend plate extend to within 1/2-inch of panel mold or glass bead. E. Miscellaneous 1. Metal Thresholds a. Where required, modify thresholds to receive projecting bolts of flush bolts and exit devices. b. Thresholds for doors accessible to handicapped: Raised thresholds, corrugated, beveled with slopes not exceeding 1:2, and with height not exceeding 1/2-inch. Bevel not required where height is less than 1/2-inch. F. Accessories 1. Special Tools: Provide special tools such as spanner and socket wrenches and dogging keys, required to adjust hardware items. .- 03879400 HARDWARE 08700 - 6 07/02 — Interior Renovation G. Fastenings 1. Provide proper type, size, quantity, and finish with each article of hardware. 2. Concrete or Grout Filled Masonry: Provide machine screws and expansion shields. 3. Hollow Masonry: Provide resin filled screen anchors equal to Hilti C7 anchors. 4. Gypsum Wallboard: Provide nylon or derlin expansion anchors equal to Hilti "Togglers". 5. Fastenings exposed to weather and in finished work: brass, bronze, or stainless steel. 6. Provide one-way or tamperproof screws on exterior doors equipped with half or full surface hinges. H. Fire Door Hardware 1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. I. Finishes 1. Painting of primed surfaces: Specified in Section 09900 - Painting. 2. Conform to ANSI A156.18 as follows: a. Hinges: BHMA 626. b. Lock and door trim: BHMA 626. C. Door closers: BHMA 630. d. Miscellaneous hardware: Finish appearance to match door hardware. e. Aluminum housed weatherstripping: Finish appearance to match door hardware. t- f. Thresholds: Finish appearance to match door hardware. 3. Door Protection Plates a. Metal Plates: BHMA 630. J. Keying 1. Provide a an extension of existing keying system. 2. Key locks in sets or subsets. s•, 3. Furnish locks with the manufacturer's standard construction key system. 4. Send keys directly from lock manufacturer to Owner by registered mail or other approved means. 5. Supply keys in following quantities: k a. 2 keys for each lock b. 3 master keys C. 3 grand master keys d. 3 great grand master keys e. 6 construction keys f. 2 control keys. 6. Furnish keys to Owner arranged in a container for key control system storage in sets or subsets as scheduled. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that power supply is available to power operated devices. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 03879400 HARDWARE 08700 - 7 07/02 — Interior Renovation 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Locate in accordance with DHI 04 and DHI 05 recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames and DHI Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames. ., 2. Install in accordance with DHI-02. 3. When approved, slight variations in locations or dimensions will be permitted. 4. Attach door control devices for exterior doors such as closers and holders to doors with i thru bolts such as sex bolts and nuts. 5. Conform to 36CFR Part 1191 for positioning requirements for handicapped. B. Door -Closing Device 1. Install and adjust in accordance with templates and printed instructions supplied by manufacturer. 2. Insofar as practicable, mount closer on room side of door for doors opening to or from halls and corridors. C. Kick Plates 1. Armor Plates: Where scheduled, install on push side of single -acting doors and on both sides of double-acting doors. 2. Kick Plates: Where scheduled, install on push side of single -acting doors and on both sides of double-acting doors. 3. Mop Plates a. Where scheduled, install on pull side of single -acting doors where door is scheduled to receive armor or kick plate. b. Where scheduled, install on pull side of single -acting doors where door not scheduled to receive armor or kick plate. D. Door Edgings 1. Install on stop face of butt edge of door unless otherwise scheduled. E. Auxiliary Hardware 1. Install lever extension flush bolts at top and bottom of inactive leaf of pairs of doors. 2. Install dust -proof floor strike or threshold, cut-out for bottom bolt F. Thresholds 1. Install in a bed of sealant with stainless steel screws and expansion shields. 2. Provide proper clearance and an effective seal with specified weather stripping. 3. Minimum screw size: #10, length dependent on job conditions. G. Weatherseals 1. Locate as indicated, snug to door face and fastened in place with color matched metal screws after door and frames have been finish painted. "® 2. Install to exclude light and air flow when door is in closed position. 3. Screw spacing: as recommended by manufacturer. H. Gasketing 1. Install at inside edge of hinge, head and latch side of door frame. I. Hardware for Labeled Fire Doors 1. Install in accordance with requirements of NFPA 80 AND NFPA 105. — 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE See attached. END OF SECTION 03879400 HARDWARE 08700 - 8 07/02 — Interior Renovation SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass [and plastic] glazing for Sections referencing this Section for products and installation. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories: Framed mirrors. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in Buildings. B. ASCE 7-95 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures. C. ASTM C864 - Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal, Gaskets, Setting Blocks and Spacers. D. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. E. ASTM C1048 - Heat -Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. F. ASTM C1281 — Preformed Tape Sealants for Glazing Applications. G. GANA - Glazing Manual. H. GANA - Sealant Manual. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS -•- A. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass as calculated in accordance with ASCE 7-95 code to a design pressure of 20 lb/sq ft as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E330. B. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Glass: a. Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. b. Polycarbonate material manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning materials and methods. C. Provide copy of manufacturer's sample warranty. 03879400 GLAZING 08800 - 1 r. 07/02 — Interior Renovation 2. Glazing Sealants, Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special precautions required. C. Samples: 1. Submit four samples, minimum 6 x 6 inch in size, illustrating glass units, of cut out design. Mark each sample to match glazing legend. 2. Submit 3 inch long bead of glazing sealant, color as scheduled. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual, SIGMA and GANA Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. 1.9 COORDINATION -" A. Coordinate the Work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal to adjacent Work. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide Warranties in accordance with Section 01700. B. Ten year manufacturer's warranty: 1. Include coverage for plastic film from coating failure, fading or cracking for 5 years. 2. Include coverage for delamination of laminated glass and replacement of same. 3. Include coverage for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of same. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Flat Glass Materials 1. Libbey-Owens-Ford Co. --- 2. PPG Industries, Inc. 3. Spectrum Glass Products, Inc. 4. Viracon. B. Mirror Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I — Transparent Glass, Flat; Class 1 — Clear; Quality q2 mirror; size as scheduled. C. Glazing Compounds 1. Dow Corning Corp. 2. GE Silicones. 3. Norton Co. L.r'R 4. Pecora Corp. 5. Tremco Mfg. Co. 6. VIP Enterprises, Inc. 03879400 GLAZING 08800 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation t'^ D. Channels 1. Western Integrated Materials, Inc. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS 1117 A. Glazing 1. G 1 - Tempered Safety Glass: 0.030 inch thick clear polyvinyl butyryl sandwiched between two 3/ 16 inch thick panes of glass conforming to ASTM C 1048, Kind FT - Fully tempered with horizontal tempering; Condition A, uncoated; Type I - Transparent Glass, Flat; Class 1 clear; Quality q3 glazing select; conforming to ANSI Z97.1. B. Glazing Accessories h 1. Glazing Gaskets: ASTM C864 Resilient type as recommended by glazing manufacturer for framing system furnished with extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; " black color. 2. Mirror Attachment Accessories: Stainless steel clips. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive glazing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. 2. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 3. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. 4. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. B. O pacifier Film 1. Install plastic film with adhesive, applied in accordance with film manufacturer's instructions. 2. Place without air bubbles, creases or visible distortion. 3. Fit tight to glass perimeter with razor cut edge. 03879400 GLAZING 08800 - 3 07/02 — Interior Renovation 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after work is complete. C. Clean glass and mirrors. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. After installation, mark pane with an by using removable plastic tape or paste. Do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. END OF SECTION 03879400 GLAZING 08800 - 4 07/02 — Interior Renovation f" SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal stud wall framing. -, B. Framing accessories. C. Acoustical insulation. D. Acoustical sealant. E. Gypsum board. F. Taped and sanded joint treatment. G. Batten joint treatment. H. Texture finish. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking for support of surface mounted accessories specified in other sections. B. Section 06610 — Glass -Fiber -Reinforced Plastic. C. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: Thermal and Acoustical Insulation. D. Section 07270 - Firestopping: Fire -Resistive -Rated Joint Sealants. E. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames. F. Section 09900 -Painting: Surface Finish. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard. B. ASTM C442 - Gypsum Backing Board and Core Board. C. ASTM C475 - Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. D. ASTM C557 - Adhesive for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing. E. ASTM C630 - Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board. F. ASTM C645 - Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. G. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. H. ASTM C754 - Installation of Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Board. 1. ASTM C840 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. J. ASTM C919 - Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. K. ASTM C 1047 - Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base. L. ASTM C 1311 - Solvent -Release Sealants. M. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 03879400 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 1 07/02 — Interior Renovation N. ASTM E90 - Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. O. ASTM E119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. P. ASTM E497 - Installing Sound -Isolating Lightweight Partitions. Q. ASTM E 1190 - Strength of Power -Actuated Fasteners Installed in Structural Members. R. FM 1-21 - Fire Resistance of Building Assemblies. S. FS FF-P-395 (Rev. C) - Pin, Drive Guided and Pin Driver, Powder Actuated (Fasteners for Powder Actuated and Hand Actuated Fastening Tools). T. GA-214 - Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. U. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual. V. UL - Fire Resistance Directory and Building Material Directory. W. WHI - Certification Listings. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Acoustical Attenuation for Identified Interior Partitions: STC 38 in accordance with ASTM E90. B. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. C. Partition Component Sizes and Spacings: Provide steel framing members as indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754 under the following maximum deflection and lateral loading conditions: 1. Exterior Non -Axial Load Bearing Components a. Maximum Deflection: L/600 at 20 lbf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. 2. Interior Partitions a. Maximum Deflection: L/240 at 5 lbf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. b. Maximum Deflection: L/120 at 5 lbf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. C. Maximum Deflection: L/120 at 7.5 lbf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. d. Maximum Deflection: L/120 at 10 lbf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. 3. Ceiling Component Sizes and Spacings: As indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754, maximum deflection of L/240 and deadload of 5 lbf per sq. ft. minimum, spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit following in accordance with provisions of Section 01300: 1. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing and acoustical seals. 2. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, joint tape and joint compounds. 3. Samples: a. Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating wall texture. 03879400 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation 0-1 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. B. Regulatory Requirements 1. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies: C. Material Compatibility 1. Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. C. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. D. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. E. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions 1. General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Room Temperatures a. For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F. b. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after until dry. C. Do not exceed 95 deg F when using temporary heat sources. 3. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Studs 1. United States Gypsum Co. 2. Dale Industries 3. Unitech 4. Dietrich 5. Alabama Metals Corp. 6. Celotex Building Products 03879400 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 3 07/02 — Interior Renovation 7. G-P Gypsum Corp. 8. National Gypsum Co. 9. United States Gypsum Co. -- B. Gypsum Board 1. United States Gypsum Co. 2. Celotex Building Products - 3. G-P Gypsum Corp. 4. National Gypsum Co. 5. United States Gypsum Co. C. Insulation 1. United States Gypsum Co. 2. Celotex Building Products 3. G-P Gypsum Corp. 4. National Gypsum Co. 5. United States Gypsum Co. D. Sheathing Tape 1. W.R. Grace 2. Protecto Wrap Co.; Denver CO. E. Vapor Barrier Tape - l. 3M Corporation F. Accessories 1. United States Gypsum Co. 2. Celotex Building Products 3. G-P Gypsum Corp. 4. National Gypsum Co. 5. United States Gypsum Co. G. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Framing 1. Interior Studs and Tracks a. To Receive Gypsum Board: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 25 gage thick (unless otherwise specified or required by partition height for loading specified), C shape, with knurled faces. Double 20 gage studs at door frame jambs. 2. Furring, Framing and Accessories: ASTM C645. 3. Interior Channels: ASTM C645; Hot or Cold -rolled steel, rust inhibitive coating. 4. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product designed to reduce sound transmission, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 525 or ASTM A 568 to form 1/2-inch-deep channel of the following configuration: a. Double -Leg Configuration: Hat -shaped channel, with 1-1/2-inch-wide face connected to flanges by double slotted or expanded metal legs (webs). B. Gypsum Board 1. Standard Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; 5/8 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, square edges. 2. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; fire resistive type, UL rated; 5/8 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, square - edges. 3. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C630; 5/8 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, square edges. 03879400 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 4 07/02 - Interior Renovation FM C. Accessories 1. Acoustical Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed mineral fiber, friction fit, Type I unfaced, thickness as indicated. 2. Acoustical Sealant: ASTM C1311; Non -hardening, non -skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board; black in concealed locations; color as selected from manufacturer's standard in exposed locations. 3. Trim: a. Corner Beads: ASTM C1047; Galvanized steel with knurled faces; 1-1/4 inch ., wide flanges. b. Edge Trim: ASTM C 1047; Galvanized steel with knurled faces, types as indicated. C. Accent Trim: 1) PVC: ASTM C 1047 and ASTM D3678; of profile indicated. 4. Furring Brackets: ASTM C645; galvanized steel. Serrated -arm type, adjustable, minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0.0329 inch, designed for screw attachment to steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for furring. E 5. Joint Materials: ASTM C475; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water. 6. Wall Texture: Latex based aggregated texturing material. ►^ 7. Fasteners a. Framing to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. b. Powder -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: FS FF-P-395 (Rev. C), size and type recommended by framing manufacturer. a C. Metal Framing to Metal Framing: Manufacturer's standard screw attachments. d. Gypsum Board to Metal Framing 1) Screws complying with ASTM C954; type as required for substrate ` indicated. 2) Adhesive: ASTM C557. e. Gypsum Board to Wood Framing: Nails complying with ASTM C514. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach comply with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Metal Studs 1. General a. Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754. and manufacturer's instructions. b. Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center (regardless of fire rated partition allowances for wider spacings unless otherwise indicated. 2. Form all corners and intersections using conventional three stud framing. 03879400 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 5 07/02 — Interior Renovation 3. Interior Partition a. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending through the ceiling bracing and for partitions extending through the ceiling structure above. b. Non -Fire Rated Partitions: Brace partitions with runner track running diagonally from top of partition to underside of roof or floor deck above and space alternately at 4 feet on center maximum. C. Fire Rated Partitions 1) Where open web steel joints are used as the framing members. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. 2) Provide deflection track at head of all full height partitions and install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3) Frame all sides of openings for ducts of any size. 4) Frame all sides of openings for fire dampers, smoke dampers and combination fire/smoke dampers in accordance with damper manufacturer's listed assembly. 4. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install stud tracks on each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent studs. 5. Blocking: Screw wood blocking to studs. Install blocking for support of finish carpentry items, plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories and hardware. 6. Coordinate installation of wood bucks, anchors, and wood blocking with electrical and mechanical work to be placed within or behind stud framing. B. Metal Wall Furring 1. Erect wall furring for direct attachment to concrete block and brick walls. 2. Erect furring channels horizontally; space maximum 16 inches on center, not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center. 3. Erect free-standing metal stud framing spaced 1 inch from concrete and concrete masonry walls, attached by adjustable furring brackets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Install furring as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and manufacturer's instructions. C. Acoustical Accessories 1. Install resilient channels at maximum 24 inches on center. Locate joints over framing members. 2. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. 3. Install acoustical sealant within partitions in accordance with ASTM C919, ASTM E497, and manufacturer's instructions. 4. Caulk all penetrations of partitions by conduit, pipe, duct work and rough -in boxes, in conformance with ASTM E497. D. Gypsum Board 1. Install gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840 and manufacturer's instructions. 2. Erect single layer standard gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 3. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing. 4. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing. 03879400 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 6 07/02 — Interior Renovation r-1 5. Double Layer Applications a. Use gypsum backing board for first layer, placed perpendicular to framing or aa, furring members. Use fire rated gypsum backing board for fire rated partitions. b. Place second layer perpendicular to first layer. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer. 6. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant. 7. Control Joints a. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as required by ASTM C840. b. Install control joints at each corner above each jamb of all door frames. Extend control joint from top of frame head to top of partition. 8. Place corner beads at all exposed external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials at all exposed locations. Leave a 1/4 inch space between edge trim and dissimilar material. Seal joint with sealant specified in Section 07900. E. Joint Treatment 1. Gypsum Board: Install joint treatment in conformance with ASTM C840 and to level as defined by GA-214 and as scheduled at the end of this Section. .. 2. Cementitious Backing Board: Tape joints and comers in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. F. Texture Finish 1. Walls: Apply finish texture coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved sample, to all surfaces scheduled to receive paint. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from plumb and true Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. 3.4 JOINT TREATMENT SCHEDULE A. Level 1: All gypsum board surfaces concealed above ceilings. B. Level 2: All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive ceramic tile and behind fixed millwork. C. Level 3: All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive spray applied texture wall coverings. D. Level 4: All gypsum board surface scheduled to receive Type II wall coverings. E. Level 5: All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive paint. END OF SECTION 03879400 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 7 07/02 — Interior Renovation SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical tile. C. Non -fire rated assemblies. D. Perimeter trim. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: Thermal and Acoustical Insulation over Acoustical Ceilings. B. Section 15932 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices,in ceiling system. C. Section 16515 - Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM C423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. B. ASTM C635 - Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings. C. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels. D. ASTM E 84-87 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. ASTM E 90-87 Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. F. ASTM E 119-83 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. G. ASTM E580 Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint. H. ASTM E1111 Measuring the Interzone Altenuation of Ceiling Systems. I. ASTM E1414 Airborne Sound Altenuation Between Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum. J. ASTM E 1264 Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products K. CISCA - Acoustical Ceilings: Use and Practice. L. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Fire Resistance Directory, System Ratings. M. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Building Materials Directory. 03879400 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 1 07/02 — Interior Renovation 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension system and ceiling panels with five years minimum experience. B. Installer: Company with three years minimum documented experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for combustibility requirements for materials. B. Provide acoustical tile with the following surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: 1. Flame Spread: Class II, 26-75. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. C. Identify acoustical tile with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other work or ceiling finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to system. Indicate method of suspension where interference exists. C. Product Data 1. Provide product data on metal grid system components, acoustic units, accessories. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. D. Samples 1. Submit four samples, 12 x 12 inch in size, illustrating material and finish of acoustic units. 2. Submit four samples each, 12 inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross runner, and edge trim. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical units to project site in original unopened packages. B. Store materials in enclosed space protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight and surface contamination. C. Handle acoustic units carefully to avoid chipping edges or surface finish. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 1 box of each type acoustical ceiling unit specified to Owner. 03879400 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Armstrong World Industries; Lancaster, PA B. Celotex Building Products; Tampa, FL C. USG Interiors; Chicago, IL D. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Suspension Systems 1. Grid - Type C 1 units a. Conformance: ASTM C635, intermediate duty, non -fire rated as required for ceiling tile scheduled. b. Type: Exposed T. C. Finish: Factory applied white baked enamel. d. Materials: Extruded aluminum. �- 2. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, edge moldings and hold down clips as required for suspended grid system. B. Acoustic Sealant for Perimeter Moldings: Specified in Section 07900. C. Touch-up Paint: Acoustical Unit manufacturer's standard type and color to match acoustic and grid units. D. Attachment Devices 1. Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung", unless otherwise indicated. 2. Anchors in Concrete a. Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1) Type: Post -installed expansion anchors. 2) Corrosion Protection: Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 nun) for Class SC 1 service condition. 3) Power -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. 3. Wire Hangers, Braces and Ties: a. Zinc -Coated Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. b. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.016 inch diameter wire. 4. Where existing glued I x I acoustical tiles are to remain, reuse existing hanger attachments from previous grid system. Do not install new attachment devices without consulting Owner's representative first. 03879400 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 3 07/02 — Interior Renovation E. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized; size and type to suit application, to rigidly secure acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360. .., F. Acoustic Units 1. Conformance: ASTM E1264. 2. Type C Units ^ _ a. Size: 24 x 24 inches (600 x 1200 mm). b. Thickness: 5/8 inches (15 mm). C. Type: III. d. Form:2. e. Light Reflectance: 75 percent. f. NRC Range: .55 - .65 — g. CAC Range: Minimum 30. h. Fire Hazard Classification: None. i. Edge Detail: Square. j. Surface Color: White. k. Pattern: C, D. 1. Acceptable Product: Refer to Section 09915. 3. Type C 11 Units a. Size: 24 x 48 inches (600 x 1200 mm). b. Thickness: 1 inch (15 mm). C. Type: XII. - d. Form:2. e. Light Reflectance: 80 percent. f. NRC Range:.90 — 1.0 _ g. Fire Hazard Classification: None. h. Edge Detail: Square. i. Surface Color: White. j. Pattern: E k. Acceptable Product: Refer to Section 09915. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. C. Verify that walls and partitions are plumb and straight within specified tolerances. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 EXISTING WORK A. Extend existing acoustical ceiling installations using materials and methods as specified. B. Clean and repair existing acoustical ceilings which remain or are to be reinstalled. C. Remove, store and protect existing ceiling tiles necessary for renovation. Reinstall in grid system; replace with matching tile if damaged. 03879400 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 4 07/02 — Interior Renovation 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Suspension System 1. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636, manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this Section. 2. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum. 3. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate with Information Technologies cable installation. 4. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. 5. If metal deck is not supplied with hanger tabs, coordinate the installation of hanger clips during steel deck erection. Provide additional hangers and inserts as required. 6. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. 7. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. 8. Center system on room axis leaving equal border units no less than 50 percent of acoustical unit size in accordance with reflected ceiling plan. 9. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. 10. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each comer; or support components independently. 11. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. 12. Perimeter Molding a. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces into bed of acoustic sealant. b. Use longest practical lengths. C. Miter comers. d. Install at junctions with other interruptions. 13. Form expansion joints as detailed. Form to accommodate plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm) movement. Maintain visual closure. B. Acoustic Units 1. Fit in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. 2. Lay units one way with pattern parallel to longest room axis. 3. Fit border neatly against abutting surfaces. 4. Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and 5. Install level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents. 6. Rabbet edges of field cut reveal edge border file to match factory edges. Paint field cut edges to match factory finish. 7. Cutting Acoustic Units a. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. 8. Where round obstructions occur, install preformed closures to match perimeter molding. C. Accessories 1. Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system within 10 ft of an exterior door. 03879400 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 5 07/02 — Interior Renovation 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 ft. B. Maximum variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: Two degrees maximum. 3.5 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide two full cartons extra quantity of each type acoustic units specified to Contracting Officer at location designated. END OF SECTION 03879400 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 6 07/02 — Interior Renovation r^ SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient tile flooring. B. Resilient base. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Cove trim sealant. B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Wall materials to receive base. C. Section 09680 - Carpet - Glue Down: Termination edging of adjacent floor finish. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM D2047 - Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish -Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine. B. ASTM D4078 - Water Emulsion Floor Polish. C. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. D. ASTM E648 - Critical Radiant Flux of Floor -Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. E. ASTM F1066 Vinyl Composition Floor Tile. F. ASTM F1303 Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing. G. Rubber Manufacturers Association - Moisture Emission Test Unit H. FS SS-T-312- Tile, Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl and Vinyl Composition. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire performance ratings as follows: 1. Flooring, critical radiant flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, per ASTM E 648. 2. Flooring, smoke density: Maximum 450, per ASTM E662. 3. Wall base: Flame spread maximum 75, smoke developed maximum 450 per ASTM E84. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics, sizes, patterns and colors available. 03879400 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 09650 - 1 07/02 — Interior Renovation is B. Manufacturer's Instructions 1. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. C. Samples 1. Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for initial color selection. 2. Submit four samples 12 x 12 inches in size, illustrating color and pattern for each floor material specified. 3. Submit one sample 12 inches long for each base and stair material. D. Closeout Submittals 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01700. 2. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested methods and schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re -waxing. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F. B. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide one box of each color of tile, 66 sq ft of each color and type of sheet vinyl flooring and 50 lineal feet of base and stair materials of each material specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Tile Flooring Types F 1 and F2 1. Vinyl Plastics, Inc., Sheboygan, WI. 2. Tarkett, Inc., Parsippany, NJ. 3. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Lancaster, PA. 4. Azrock Industries, Inc., San Antonio, TX. B. Resilient Base 1. Vinyl Plastics, Inc., Sheboygan, WI. 2. Johnson Rubber Company, Middlefield, OH. 3. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Lancaster, PA. 4. Mercer Products Co., Inc., Orlando, FL. 5. R.C. Musson Rubber Co., Akron, OH. 6. Roppe Rubber Corp., Fostoria, OH. 03879400 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 09650 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation r C. Accessories: As recommended by flooring manufacturer. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Vinyl Composition Tile ASTM F1066; 12 x 12 inch size, 1/8 inch thick; design and color as selected. 1. Conformance: ASTM F1066, Class 2. 2. Size: 12 x 12 x 1/8 inch thick 3. Color/Pattern: Color and pattern through total thickness. Color equal to design and color indicated in Section 09915. B. Base 1. Compliance: FS SS-W-40, Type I rubber or Type 2 vinyl; Style A. 2. Size: 4 inches high; 1/8 inch thick; colors as selected by Architect. 3. Length: Roll. 4. Accessories: Premolded end stops and external corners, of same material, size, and color as base. C. Accessories �^ 1. Subfloor Filler: Premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. 2. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. 3. Edge Strips: Same material as flooring. s- 4. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 ft, and are ready to receive Work. B. Verify concrete floors exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting. C. Verify that concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content as recommended by manufacturer as follows: 1. Prior to installation of any resilient flooring, conduct quantitative moisture emissions j-- tests in accordance with Rubber Manufacturers Association Guidelines. 2. Maximum Allowable Moisture Content: 3 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hours. 3. Test Quantities: Minimum of 4 tests for areas up to 5,000 sq. ft. and one additional test r., for each additional 5,000 sq. ft. of floor area. 4. After concrete floor surfaces have been cleaned, spread small patches of adhesive to be in several locations in each room and allowed to dry overnight. 5. If the adhesive can be peeled easily from the floor surfaces, the floor is not sufficiently dry. 6. Apply resilient flooring when tests show that the adhesive adheres tightly to the floor surface, r-, 7. If concrete floors are in contact with the ground or over unventilated crawl spaces, use small patches of primer in lieu of adhesive to test for moisture. D. Verify floor and lower wall surfaces are free of substances that may impair adhesion of new adhesive and finish materials. E. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 03879400 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 09650 - 3 07/02 — Interior Renovation 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. B. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with subfloor filler. C. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave a smooth, flat, hard surface. D. Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured. E. Vacuum clean substrate. F. Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed-thru" or interference with adhesion by substances that cannot be removed. 3.3 EXISTING WORK A. Extend existing resilient flooring installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations, or as specified. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. 2. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion 3. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. 4. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. Secure resilient strips by adhesive. 5. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 6. Install flooring in recessed floor access covers. Maintain floor pattern. 7. At movable partitions, install flooring under partitions without interrupting floor pattern. B. Tile Flooring 1. Mix file from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed. 2. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern. 3. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter. C. Base 1. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between j oints. 2. Miter internal corners. 3. At external corners, use premolded units. 4. At exposed ends, use premolded units. 5. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. 6. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Subfloor Flatness: Maximum 1/8 inch deviation in 10 feet. B. Vertical Alignment (Offset from edge of tile to edge of tile): None allowed. C. Horizontal Alignment (Offset from a straight line): Plus or minus l/16 inch in any length. 03879400 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 09650 - 4 07/02 — Interior Renovation r7 3.6 CLEANING ,.� A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final cleaning. B. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. C. Clean, seal, and wax floor and base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Section 01700 -Contract Closeout: Protecting installed construction. B. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. "" END OF SECTION 03879400 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 09650 - 5 07/02 — Interior Renovation SECTION 09680 CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glue down carpet. �., B. Adhesives, floor fillers, edge strips and accessories 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring and Base: Base finish. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. ASTM D 1335 Tuft Bind of Pile Floor Covering. C. ASTM D 1423 Twist in Yams by the Direct -Counting Method. D. ASTM D 2257 Extractable Matter in Yams. E. ASTM D2859 Flammability of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials. F. ASTM D 3936 Delamination Strength of Secondary Backing of Pile Floor Coverings. G. (CPSC) Publication: 16 CFR 1630 Standard for the Surface Flammability of Carpet and Rugs. H. (AATCC) Test Methods: 16E-1982 Colorfastness to Light: Water -Cooled Rev 85 Xenon -arc Lamp, Continuous Light. I. AATCC Crockmeter Method: 165 Colorfastness to Crocking. J. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet. K. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux for Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. B. Closeout Submittals 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01700. 2. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested. methods and schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re -waxing. C. Samples 1. Submit four samples 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each carpet material specified. 03879400 CARPETING 09680 - 1 07/02 — Interior Renovation 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in woven carpet with ten years minimum experience. B. Installer: Company with 5 years minimum documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable UBC and NFPA 101 code as indicated on drawings for fire performance ratings as follows: 1. Flooring, critical radiant flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, per ASTM E 648 and NFPA 253. 2. Flooring, smoke density: Maximum 450 per ASTM E662. 3. Surface Flammability Ignition: Conform to ASTM D2859. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability. B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature three days prior to, during and 24 hours after installation of materials. C. Ventilate installation area during installation and for 3 days after installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Carpet 1. Collins and Aikman B. Sub -floor Filler 1. W.W. Henry Co., Huntington Park, CA. C. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Carpet B. Accessories 1. Sub -Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Primers and Adhesives a. Waterproof; of types recommended by carpet manufacturer. 3. Edge Strips: Vinyl type, smooth finish, color as selected from manufacturer's standard. 03879400 CARPETING 09680 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation r^ PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat and are ready to receive work. 1. Measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled freestanding 10-foot-long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed 1/8 inch. 2. Deviation from edge of construction; control or expansion joint to adjacent edge: No deviation allowed. B. Verify concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content of 7 percent; and exhibit negative carbonization, or dusting. C. Alkalinity: pH range of 5-9. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub -floor filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave smooth, flat, hard surface. C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. D. Vacuum floor surface. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Lay out rolls of carpet for approval. B. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots. C. Double cut carpet, to allow intended seam and pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed. D. Locate seams in area of least traffic. E. Fit seams straight, not crowded or peaked, free of gaps. F. Lay carpet on floors with run of pile in same direction, or as directed by manufacturer, for anticipated traffic. G. Do not change run of pile in any room where carpet is continuous through a wall opening into another room. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline. H. Cut and fit carpet around interruptions. I. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. J. Apply carpet and adhesive in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. K. Install carpet in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and CRI 104 Section 8 Direct Glue -Down Installation. 1. Apply contact adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by manufacturer. After sufficient open time, press carpet into adhesive. 2. Apply seam adhesive. Lay adjoining piece with seam straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps. 3. Roll with appropriate roller for complete contact of adhesive to carpet backing. L. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. Bind cut edges where not concealed by edge strips. 03879400 CARPETING 09680 - 3 07/02 — Interior Renovation 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic from carpet areas for 24 hours after installation. 3.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 120 sq ft of carpeting in each color/pattern as specified. Deliver to Owner as directed. END OF SECTION 03879400 CARPETING 09680 - 4 07/02 — Interior Renovation Ni SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Surface finish schedule. C. Color selection schedule. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Texture on gypsum wallboard surfaces. B. Section 15391 - Marking and Identification: Color schedule for equipment and piping. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. B. ASTM D1546 - Method for Performance Tests of Clear Floor Sealers. C. ASTM D 1730 - Practices for Preparation of Aluminum and Aluminum Surfaces for Painting. D. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. E. ASTM D2092 - Practice for Preparation of Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Surfaces for Painting. F. ASTM D2486 - Test Method for Scrub Resistance of Interior Latex Flat Wall Paints. G. ASTM D 3 3 5 9 - Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. H. ASTM D3730 - Guide for Testing High -Performance Interior Architectural Wall Coatings. I. ASTM D4138 - Test Method for Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Protective Coating Systems by Destructive Means. J. ASTM D4258 - Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. K. ASTM 134261 - Surface Cleaning Concrete Masonry for Coating. L. ASTM D4262 - Test Method for pH of Chemically Cleaned or Etched Concrete Surfaces. M. ASTM D4263 - Test Methods for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. N. ASTM D4414 - Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by Notch Gages. O. ASTM D4540 - Guide for Testing Interior Latex Semigloss and Gloss Paints. P. ASTM D4541 - Test Method for Pull -Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers Q. Steel Structure Painting Council - Steel Structures Painting Manual Xb�_93#ai ' 1119WRI A. Conform to ANSFASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. 03879400 07/02 — Interior Renovation PAINTING 09900 - 1 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with five years experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with five years documented experience. C. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to UBC Class I and NFPA 101 Class A for flame spread/smoke development rating requirements for finishes of 0-25/0-450. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Provide product data on all stripping and finishing products. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed application instructions. B. Samples 1. Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled, for selection. C. Certificates 1. Submit paint manufacturer's certificate(s) stating the following: a. Paints for interior use contain no mercurial mildewcide. b. Paints for interior use contain no insecticide. C. Paints for interior use contain no more than 0.06 percent lead. d. Paints proposed for use meet the VOC regulations of the local Air pollution District having jurisdiction over the geographical area in which the project is located. D. Field Samples 1. Provide field sample panel, 48 inches long by 48 inches wide, illustrating special coating color, and finish. 2. Locate where directed. 3. Accepted sample may remain as part of the Work. 4. Provide test panel areas adequate in size to show stripping method and expected final surface for each surface to be stripped. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance. C. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. D. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F. and a maximum of 90 degrees F., in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F. for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. 03879400 PAINTING 09900 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation A•. B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 50 percent, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. ., C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F. for interiors; 50 degrees F. for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Synthetic Finishes: 65 degrees F. for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid -height at substrate surface. 1.10 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide a one gallon container of each color to Owner at location designated. B. Label each container with color and room locations, in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. ICI Paint Stores, Cleveland, OH. B. Kelly -Moore Paint Co., Inc., San Carlos, CA. C. PPG Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh, PA. D. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Coatings 1. Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. 2. Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 3. Compatible with existing coatings in renovation areas. B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve finishes specified, of commercial quality. C. Stripping Agents: As recommended by manufacturer for finish to be removed. 03879400 PAINTING 09900 - 3 07/02 — Interior Renovation 2.3 FINISHES A. Refer to schedule at end of Section for surface finish schedule. B. The schedule is based on the products of ICI Paint Stores and Kelly Moore Paint Co., Inc. as follows: No. Product Name (ICI Paint) Type 1. 1000 Ultra-Basecoat Primer Latex 2. 1030 PVA Primer/ Sealer Latex 3. 1110 Ultra -Hide Stain Jammer Vinyl Toluene 4. 1310 Ultra -Hide Prime-n-Finish Alkyd 5. 1370 Spraymaster DTG Alkyd -Flat 6. 1402 Dulux Professional Wall & Trim Enamel Latex - Eggshell 7. 1406 Dulux Professional Wall & Trim Enamel Latex -Semi Gloss 8. 1434 Ultra -Wall Enamel Latex, Low Lustre 9. 1482 Spray Master Pro Uni-Grip WB Latex -Eggshell 10. 1516 Ultra -Hide Wall & Trim Enamel Alkyd, Semi -Gloss 11. 1582 Spray Master Dryfall Alkyd -Eggshell 12. 1700 Woodpride Stain Alkyd — Oil 13. 1802 Woodpride Interior Varnish Waterborne -Satin 14. 1808 Woodpride - WB Interior Varnish Waterborne Clear Gloss 15. 1916 QD Sanding Sealer Vinyl Toluene 16. 2000 Decra-Shield exterior primer Acrylic -Latex 17. 2406 Decra-Shield Acrylic -Semi -Gloss 18. 2516 Ultra -Hide Durus Exterior Enamel Alkyd -Semi -Gloss 19. 3038 Ultra -Hide Durus Acrylic Gloss 20. 4000 Bloxfil Block Filler Acrylic 21. 4020 Devflex DTM Primer Acrylic 22. 4160 Devguard Tank & Structural Primer Alkyd 23. 4206 Devflex Acrylic Waterborne Acrylic, Semi -Gloss 24. 4308 Devguard Industrial Enamel Alkyd -Gloss 25. 4406 Tru-Glaze-WB Waterborne Epoxy, Semi -Gloss 26. HF10 High Heat Coating Silicone Flat 27. HT-12 High Heat Silicone Flat No. Product Name (Kelly -Moore) Type 1. 70 Kel-Guard Synthetic Rubber C. Dry mill film thickness (DMFT) indicated is minimum acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. 03879400 PAINTING 09900 - 4 07/02 — Interior Renovation C. Moisture Content 1. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. a. Field test concrete in accordance with ASTM D4263. b. Test moisture content of wood in accordance with ASTM D2016. 2. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below following maximums: a. Gypsum Soffits: 12 percent. b. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Masonry, Unit Masonry: 12 percent. d. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. e. Exterior Located Wood: 12 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. f. Concrete Floors: 7 percent. g. Vertical Concrete Surfaces: 12 percent. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Unpainted Surfaces 1. General a. Prepare surface in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended procedures unless higher level of preparation is specified. -� b. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. C. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section. .,, d. Shellac and seal marks on wood surfaces which may bleed through surface finishes. 2. Impervious Surfaces a. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. b. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. 3. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces a. Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. b. Apply latex based compatible sealer or primer. 4. Insulated Coverings a. Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. 5. Concrete Floors a. Clean in accordance with ASTM D4258. b. Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. t^ C. Verify required acid -alkali balance is achieved in accordance with ASTM D4262. d. Allow to dry. 6. Galvanized Surfaces a. Clean in accordance with ASTM D1730. b. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. C. Apply coat of etching primer. �. 7. Aluminum Surfaces a. Clean in accordance with ASTM D1730. b. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. C. Apply coat of etching primer. 8. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces a. Clean concrete in accordance with ASTM D4258. b. Clean unit masonry in accordance with ASTM D4261. 03879400 PAINTING 09900 - 5 07/02 — Interior Renovation �,,,, C. Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. d. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. e. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. f. Allow to dry. 9. Plaster Surfaces a. Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. b. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. C. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. 10. Steel and Iron Surfaces a. Concealed Locations 1) Remove all grease, dirt, mill scale, rust and weld slag in accordance with SSPC - SP1 - Solvent Cleaning and/or SSPC - SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning and paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation. 2) Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. b. Exposed Locations 1) Remove all grease, dirt, mill scale, rust and weld slag in accordance with SSPC - SP1 - Solvent Cleaning and/or SSPC - SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning and paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation. 2) Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. 11. Interior Wood a. Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. b. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. C. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. d. Fill open grain wood to receive opaque finish with wood filler. e. Fill nail and other anchor holes in wood to receive transparent finish with filler stained to match finish. 12. Exterior Wood a. Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. b. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. C. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior caulking compound after prime coat has been applied. 13. Wood Doors a. Seal top and bottom edges with clear or opaque primer as required for finish scheduled. B. Primed and Previously Painted Surfaces 1. All Surfaces a. Thoroughly clean of all grease, dirt, dust or other foreign matter. b. Remove blistering, cracking, flaking, peeling or other deteriorated coating. C. Roughen slick/glossy surfaces. d. Repair damaged areas such as, but not limited to, nail holes, cracks, chips and spalls with suitable materials to match adjacent areas. e. Feather edges of chipped paint and sand smooth. f. Sand and scrape to remove loose primer. g. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. h. Clean surfaces with solvent. 03879400 PAINTING 09900 - 6 07/02 — Interior Renovation r-, a i. Prepare non-ferrous surfaces in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation. „._ j. Chemically Strip surfaces bare to substrate where indicated on drawings. 2. New Shop Primed Steel Surfaces a. Where higher level of preparation is specified in this Section than in other Sections for unpainted steel, comply with requirements of this Section and following: 1) At Contractor's option, either shop or field prepare steel in accordance with procedures specified in this Section. 2) If steel is shop prepared and primed in accordance with lesser requirements specified in other sections, it is considered a temporary protective coating only. (a) Remove temporary shop coatings and prepare steel in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation for unpainted surfaces. 3) If steel is shop prepared and primed in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation, field prepare in accordance with paragraph "All Surfaces" above. �— 4) Prime coat specified under paragraph 3.9, SURFACE FINISH SCHEDULE, can be eliminated except for bare areas requiring touch-up. 3. Existing Steel Surfaces �-, a. Prepare in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section. C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other surfaces. D. Remove empty paint containers from site. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Paint, Stain and Varnish 1. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. 3. Apply each coat to uniform finish. 4. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. 5. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish. 6. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. 7. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. 8. Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint. 9. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. 03879400 PAINTING 09900 - 7 07/02 — Interior Renovation 3.5 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Refer to Section 15391 for schedule of color coding and identification banding of equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit. B. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, occurring in finished areas except mechanical and electrical rooms and except where painting of scheduled wall or ceiling surface can only be accomplished by also painting these items, they will not be required to be painted. C. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally. D. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers and grilles to match face panels. E. Paint exposed conduit, boxes and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas except mechanical and electrical rooms. F. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. G. Color code equipment, plumbing piping, and exposed ductwork in accordance with requirements indicated. Color band and identify with flow arrows names and numbering. H. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing. I. Shop Primed Equipment 1. Remove louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. 2. Prepare and paint shop primed equipment as specified for base material and location. J. Shop Painted Equipment l . Prepare and paint shop painted equipment as specified for base material and location as follows: a. Interior Finished Spaces (excluding mechanical and electrical rooms): Paint surfaces to match color of adjacent finish. This applies, but is not limited to, mechanical diffusers and electrical panels and covers. b. Exterior Equipment: Where noted on drawings, paint exposed mechanical and electrical equipment color as selected by Architect. 3.6 PROTECTION OF DISSIMILAR METALS AND METALS IN MASONRY AND CONCRETE A. Where specified in other sections, protect dissimilar metals that are in direct contact and metals set on or filled with mortar or concrete with one coat of coal tar paint equal to Carboline Bitumastic Super Service Black. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General 1. When requested by Architect, provide verification of coating application and durability in accordance with specified requirements at no cost to the Owner. B. Steel Surfaces 1. Dry Film Thickness: Verify in accordance with SSPC-PA 2 - Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages. 2. Adhesion: Confirm adhesion of coating system to substrate in accordance with either ASTM D3359 (Method B) or ASTM D4541. 03879400 PAINTING 09900 - 8 07/02 — Interior Renovation __ C. Concrete Floors 1. Verify compliance in accordance with ASTM D1546. D. Other Surfaces 1. Film Thickness a. Measure wet film thickness in accordance with ASTM D4414 and convert to dry film thickness by multiplying wet film thickness by percent solids and by percent solvent added. b. Measure dry film thickness in accordance with ASTM D4138. E. Scrubbability ;^ 1. Test interior flat latex paints in accordance with ASTM D2486. F. Interior Latex Semigloss and Gloss Paints: Test in accordance with ASTM D4540. G. High -Performance Interior Architectural Wall Coatings: Test in accordance with ASTM D3730. 3.8 ADJUSTING A. Repair surfaces which have been destructively checked for dry film thickness. B. Recoat surfaces determined not to be in conformance with dry film thicknesses specified. C. Recoat in accordance with coating manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.9 CLEANING ,.., A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. 3.10 SURFACE FINISH SCHEDULE P'. A. Exterior Surfaces Surface 1st Coat (DMFT) 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (DMF) Aluminum 4020 (3.0) 2406 (2.0) 2406 (2.0) Ferrous Metals * Gates, 4160 (2.0) 4308 (2.0) 4308 (2.0) Fencing, **or** **or** Bollards, 2516 (2.0) 2516 (2.0) Bumper Guards, ,.. Railings, Exposed Lintels, Misc. Metal * Muffler Exhausts Temp to 1000 Deg. HT-12 (1.0) HT-12 (1.0) Temp to 500Deg. HT-10 (1.0) HT-10 (1.0) FS 03879400 PAINTING 09900 - 9 07/02 — Interior Renovation Surface 1st Coat (DMFT) 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (DMF) * Doors, Frames 4160 (2.0) 4308 (2.0) 4308 (2.0) and Equipment **or** **or** 2516 (2.0) 2516 (2.0) * Galvanized Metals 4160 (2.0) 4308 (2.0) 4308 (2.0) Louvers, **or** **or** Ducts, 2516 (2.0) 2516 (2.0) Downspouts, Misc. Wood 2000 (2.1) 2406 (1.4) 2406 (1.4) B. Interior Surfaces Surface 1st Coat (DMFT) 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (DMF) -' Concrete * Concrete Walls 1030 Varies 1406(1.4) 1406(1.4) * Concrete Floors 70 (1.0) 70 (1.0) Concrete Masonry (CMU) 4000 Varies 1406 (1.4) 1406 (1.4) **or** **or** 1402 (1.4) 1402 (1.4) **or** **or** 1434 (1.4) 1434 (1.4) * Plaster 1000 varies 1406 (1.4) 1406 (1.4) **or** **or** 1402 (1.4) 1402 (1.4) _ **or** **or** 1434 (1.4) 1434 (1.4) Metal Decking Galvanized 1370 1582 (2.0) 1582 (2.0) Primed 1482 (2.0) 1482 (2.0) **or** **or** 1582 (2.0) 1582 (2.0) Ferrous Metals -- Bar Joists 4160 (2.0) 1482 (2.0) 1482 (2.0) & Beams **or** **or** (Exposed) 1582 (2.0) 1582 (2.0) Doors and Frames, 4160(2.0) 1516 (2.0) 1516 (2.0) Railings, **or** **or** Equipment 4308 (2.0) 4308 (2.0) 03879400 PAINTING 09900 - 10 07/02 Interior Renovation 2 Surface 1st Coat (DMFT) 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (DMF) �., Galvanized Metal * Ducts, 1370 1516(2.0) 1516(2.0) Louvers, **or** **or** **or** Piping, 4160 (2.0) 4308 (2.0) 4308 (2.0) Vents Gypsum Drywall * Surfaces to 1110 (1.1) 1110 (1.1) receive vinyl (if required) wall covering. * Room no's. 1030 (1.1) 4206 (1.5) 4206 (1.5) All other 1030 (1.1) 1406 (1.5) 1406 (1.5) spaces. **or** **or** ..e 1402 (1.5) 1402 (1.5) **or** **or** 1434 (1.5) 1434 (1.5) * Wood Drawer 1802 (1.0) 1802 (1.0) & Cabinet Thin 50% Thin 25% IMP% Interiors **or** **or** Transp. Finish. 1808 (1.0) 1808 (1.0) * Trim, Transp. 1802 (1.0) 1802 (1.0) Finish Thin 50% Thin 25% **or** **or** 1808 (1.0) 1808 (1.0) r-+ * Trim, Transp. 1700 Varies 1802 (1.0) 1802 (1.0) Finish (Stained) Thin 50% Thin 25% r^-a **or** **or** 1808 (1.0) 1808 (1.0) ^* * Cabinets, Ext. 1700 Varies 1802 (1.0) 1802 (1.0) & Interiors Thin 50% Thin 25% Transp. Finish **or** **or** (Stained) 1808 (1.0) 1808 (1.0) * Cabinets, Ext. 1310 (1.5) 1516 (1.4) 1516 (1.4) & Interiors Opaque Finish. 03879400 PAINTING 09900 - 11 07/02 - Interior Renovation Surface 1st Coat (DMFT) 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (DMF) Wood Doors Transp. Finish 1802 (1.0) 1802 (1.0) Thin 50% Thin 50% **or** **or** 1808 (1.0) 1808 (1.0) Stained & Transp. Finish 1700 Varies 1802 (1.0) 1802 (1.0) Thin 50% Thin 50% **or** **or** 1808 (1.0) 1808 (1.0) 3.11 COLOR SELECTION SCHEDULE A. Refer to Section 09915 — Color Schedule. END OF SECTION 03879400 PAINTING 09900 - 12 07/02 — Interior Renovation wai SECTION 09915 COLOR SCHEDULE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Color of the interior materials and products that are exposed to view in the finished construction. The word "color" includes surface color, pattern and texture as indicated. B. Patterns and textures required for interior finishes, including both factory applied and field applied colors unless specified elsewhere. C. When color is not designated for items, propose a color for approval. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. General 1. Requirements for quality and method of installation are covered in other sections of the specifications. 2. Specific locations where the various materials are required are shown on the drawings. 3. Items not designated for color in this section may be specified in other sections. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 EXTERIOR COLOR SCHEDULE A. Walls 1. Prefaced CMU Featherlite #707 Saddletan burnished black. 2. Mortar: Match burnished black. 3. Vision Glass: Clear 3/8" fully tempered. B. Trim 1. Handrails: Aluminum, clear anodized w/knurled finish. 2. Coping: Match existing prefin. 3. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Paint finish, match existing. 2.2 INTERIOR COLOR SCHEDULE A. Floor Finishes 1. F1 VCT — Armstrong, Standard Excelon, 51811 "Antique White". 2. F2 Carpet — Mohawk, Enterprise II, 48701 "Sea". 3. F3 VCT — Armstrong, Standard Excelon, 51809 "Desert Beige", patch to match existing. 03879400 COLOR SCHEDULE 09915 - 1 07/02 — Interior Renovation B. Base Finishes B 1 4" rubber, Roppe P 139 Deep Navy. B2 4" rubber, Roppe P110 Brown. C. Wall Finishes W 1 Paint — GWB, Kelley Moore KM555-L "Wood Plank". W2 Paint — CMU, Kelley Moore KM555-L "Wood Plank". W3 Fiberglass Reinforced Panel. W4 Paint — existing, Kelley Moore, KM555-L "Wood Plank". D. Ceiling Finishes C1 2 x 4 Acoustic, Armstrong, Fissured, 1755, white. C2 2 x 4 Premium Acoustic, Armstrong, Optima, 3155, White. C3 2 x 4 Acoustic, match existing. E. Miscellaneous P 1 Doors —match existing. P2 Trim Paint — match existing color. P3 Laminate countertop — Wilsonart P361A-60 "Valley Pecan". P4 Laminate countertop - Wilsonart 4651 "Navy Legacy". P5 Stain — Match existing. P6 Toilet partition — selection to be made from manufacturer's standard colors. P7 Doors — paint Kelley Moore KM555-L "Wood Plank". P8 Trim paint — Kelley Moore A645-N "Dark Navy". P9 Ceiling furring — Kelley Moore KM555-L "Wood Plank". R 1 Paint new gypsum board where indicated on plans and elevators. R2 New ceiling grid to match existing ceiling height. R3 Paint existing ceiling furring. Refer to P9. R4 Accessible toilet stalls shall be in compliance with TAS; Refer to P6 for colors. R5 New ceiling furring to receive paint finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03879400 COLOR SCHEDULE 09915 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation _- A., SECTION 10100 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Constriction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. B. Drawings, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. C. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal surfaced markerboards. B. Tackboards C. Trim, marker rail and accessories. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board System: Substrate construction behind markerboards and tackboards. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard. B. ANSI/ASTM B221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. C. APA - American Plywood Association. D. ASTM A424 - Steel Sheets for Porcelain Enameling. E. ASTM B209 - Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. F. ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard. G. ASTM C208 - Insulation Board (Cellulose Fiber) Structural and Decorative. H. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. I. FS LLL-B-810 - Building Board, (Hardboard) Hard Pressed, Vegetable Fiber. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for flame spread/smoke development ratings of for markerboards and tackboards in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data I. Indicate on shop drawings, wall elevations, dimensions, joint locations special anchor details. 03879400 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 1 F" 07/02 — Interior Renovation 2. Provide product data on markerboards, tackboards, trim and accessories. Include maintenance information on regular cleaning and stain removal. 3. Submit samples illustrating materials and finish, color, and texture of markerboard trim and tackboard surfacing. 4. Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide life time warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage of markerboard surface from discoloration due to cleaning, crazing, cracking or staining. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Claridge Products & Equipment, Inc. B. Greensteel Division C. Best -Rite. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A424, Type I, 24 gage commercial quality. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ANSFASTM B221, 6061 T-5 alloy. C. Cork: Fine grain natural cork, homogeneous composition. D. Hardboard: FS LLL-B-810; tempered, smooth face. E. Foil Backing: Aluminum foil sheet .002 inch thick. F. Tackboard Covering: G. Adhesives: Type recommended by manufacturer. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Map Supports: Formed aluminum hooks (8 at each markerboard), sliding type to fit map rail. B. Provide 10 assorted markers and 2 erasers for each markerboard. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Markerboard 1. Trim: 5/8 inch wide x 0.062 inch thick extruded aluminum. 2. Chalktray: 2 5/8 inch deep extruded aluminum, with rounded and smooth polished ends; thru-bolted to writing surface. One piece, full length of markerboard; concealed fasteners. 3. Writing Surface: 24 steel with baked -on porcelain enamel surface. 4. Backing: 3/8 inch thick particle board with 0.002 inch thick foil backing. 5. Size and Configuration: 4 x 8. 6. Map Rail: Extruded aluminum with integral cork insert. 7. Acceptable Product: Claridge Series 4. 03879400 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation 2.5 FINISHES A. Marker Surface: White porcelain. B. Aluminum Frame and Accessories: Clear anodized aluminum, satin finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces and internal wall blocking are ready to receive work, and opening dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate construction. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install markerboards and tackboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure units level and plumb. C. Butt markerboard panels to tackboards tight with concealed spline to hairline joint. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean markerboard surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Cover markerboard and tackboard surfaces with protective cover, taped to frame. C. Remove protective cover at Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 03879400 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 3 07/02 — Interior Renovation SECTION 10160 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL milk 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal toilet compartments, and urinal P^ 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Framing and Sheathing: Concealed wood framing and blocking for compartment support. B. Section 10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM A424 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, for Porcelain Enameling. B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. C. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Austentic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. D. FS A-A-60003 - Partitions, Toilet, Complete. Polk 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall and floor supports, and door swings. C. Product Data: Submit data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. .. D. Samples: Submit one illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01311 - Project Coordination. B. Coordinate Work with placement of support framing and anchors in wall. 03879400 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10160 - 1 ,o„ 07/02 — Interior Renovation PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1. Accurate Partitions Corp. 2. Flush Metal Partition Corp. 3. Global Steel Products 4. The Mills Co. 5. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Product Description: Floor mounted and overhead braced. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating. B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304. C. Toilet Compartments: Baked enameled steel, floor -mounted headrail-braced. D. Doors, Panels, and Pilasters: Sheet steel faces, pressure bonded to sound deadening core, formed and closed edges, mitered and welded corners ground smooth. 1. Panel and Door Faces: 20 gage. 2. Pilaster Faces: 18 gage. 3. Reinforcement: 12 gage. 4. Internal Reinforcement: Furnish in areas of attached hardware and fittings. Mark locations of reinforcement for partition mounted washroom accessories. E. Door and Panel Dimensions: 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Door Width: 24 inch. 3. Accessible Door Width: 36 inch. 4. Height: 58 inch. F. Pilasters: 1-1 /4 inch thick, of sizes required to suit compartment width and spacing. G. Urinal Screen Splash Panels: Stainless steel sheet 24 inches wide x 42 inches high mounted on partitions adjacent to urinals. Fasten with stainless steel screws spaced 8 inches oc. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Shoes: Formed ASTM A666 type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 3 inch high, concealing floor fastenings. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster. B. Head Rails: Hollow stainless steel tube, 1 x 1-5/8 inch size, with anti -grip profile and cast socket wall brackets. C. Brackets: Stainless steel. — D. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type. 1. For attaching panels and pilasters to brackets: Through -bolts and nuts; tamper proof. E. Hardware: Stainless steel. — 1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two for each door. 2. Nylon bearings. 3. Thumb turn door latch with exterior emergency access feature. 4. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door latch. 03879400 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10160 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation - 5. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one for each compartment, mounted on door. 6. Furnish 2 door pulls for outswinging doors (one interior, one exterior). 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING A. Baked Enamel Steel Compartments: Clean, degrease, and neutralize. Follow immediately with phosphatizing treatment, prime coat and two finish coats baked enamel. B. Color: As indicated in Section 09915 - Color Schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. C. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. D. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. B. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. C. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. D. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged enamel finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Indicated Position: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. C. Adjust hinges to position doors in opened fully position when unlatched. Return out swinging doors to closed position. D. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane. E. Staff Washroom: One toilet stall of ceiling mounted type; single color as selected. END OF SECTION 03879400 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10160 - 3 07/02 — Interior Renovation r e'` SECTION 10800 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Division l - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Toilet accessories. B. Attachment hardware. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: In wall blocking and framing for support of accessories. B. Section 10160 - Metal Toilet Compartments: Supporting construction. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements 1. Conform to 36 CFR Part 1190 for location and mounting height of accessories. 1.5 REFERENCES A. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board - 36 CFR Part 1191, Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. B. ANSFASTM A 123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips. C. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. D. ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. E. ANSFASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold -Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. F. ANSFASTM A386 - Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. G. ANSFASTM B456 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium. H. ASTM A500 - Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. I. ANSFBHMA A156.16 - Auxiliary Hardware. J. FS CID A-A-2380 Dispenser, Paper Towel. K. FS L-C-780 Curtain, Shower and Window, Plastic. L. FS DD-M-00411 Mirrors, Glass. M. FS WW-D-1908 Dispenser, Toilet Paper, Cabinet. N. FS WW-H-1911 Holder, Toilet Paper (Single Roll). O. FS WW-P-541 Plumbing Fixtures (Accessories, Land Use) (Detail Specification). P. NHLA - Rules for the Measurement & Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress. 03879400 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 1 07/02 — Interior Renovation 1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Install grab bars in conformance with structural strength requirements of 36 CFR 1191 without damage to supporting structure or finishes. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Provide schedule indicating types, quantities, sizes and installation location by room for each toilet accessory item to be provided for project. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard product data on accessories describing size, finish, _ details of function, and attachment methods. 3. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. B. Samples 1. Submit two samples of each component illustrating color and finish. 1.8 KEYING A. Supply 6 keys for each accessory to Owner. B. Master key all accessories. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement to receive w. anchor attachments. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; North Hollywood, CA. B. Bradley Corporation; Menomonee Falls, WI. C. McKinney/Parker; Scranton, PA. - D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: ANSI/ASTM A366. B. Exposed Sheet Steel: ASTM A525. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304. D. Tubing: ASTM A500, stainless steel. E. Mirror Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Glass, Flat; Class 1 - Clear; Quality q1 mirror select; 1/4 inch thick minimum. F. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamperproof. G. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. H. Hardwood: Red oak, first grade in conformance with NHLA. I. Primer: Zinc Chromate. 03879400 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 2 07/02 — Interior Renovation 2.3 ACCESSORIES i° A. Grab Bar 1. Conformance: Form and length as indicated in schedule at end of this Section. 2. Acceptable products a. Form a: Bradley #8120-00 length as indicated on drawings. B. Paper Towel Dispenser (PTD) 1. Capacity: One 8" or 9" wide paper roll. 2. Size: Approximately 12-inches wide, 10 1/2-inches deep and 15-inches tall. 3. Acceptable product: Bradley#2491. C. Sanitary Napkin and Tampon Disposer (SND) 1. Conformance: FS WW-P-541/8, Type I, surface mounted, stainless steel, disposable liner type. 2. Size: Approximately 10-3/4-inches wide, 4-inches deep and 15-1/8-inches tall. a. Surface Mounted: Approximately 10-3/4" wide, 4" deep & 15-1/8" tall. 3. Acceptable product: Bradley #4722-15. D. Toilet Tissue Dispenser (TTD) 1. _ Surface mounted -single roll. 2. Size: Approximately 10 3/4" wide x 10 3/4" tall x 5 1/4" deep. 3. Acceptable product: a. Surface mounted McKinney/Essex #617. E. Soap Dispenser (SD) 1. Type: Vertical stainless steel tank, liquid type. ,. 2. Size: Approximately 4 1/4-inches wide, 4-inches deep and 11-inches tall. 3. Acceptable Product: ASI #500155. F. Mirrors (M) 1. Size: 18" x 36". 2. Acceptable product: Bradley #700 series. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General 1. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components. 2. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. 3. Form surfaces flat without distortion, scratches or dents. 4. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. 5. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. 6. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 7. Fabricate all accessories with concealed mountings covered by finished snap -on or set screw type escutcheons or mountings concealed behind units with doors unless otherwise specified. 8. Hot dip galvanize exposed and painted ferrous metal and fastening devices. 9. Provide manufacturer's standard keyed lock in all accessories having doors. 10. Provide continuous type hinge on all accessories having doors. r 03879400 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 3 07/02 - Interior Renovation B. Grab Bar (GB) 1. Fabricate from 1-1/2 inch OD seamless stainless steel tubing with 1 1/2 inch clear projection between wall and bar.. 2. Provide integral mounting flange with screw mounting holes concealed on lip of flange and designed to support grab bar in compliance with specified performance requirements. 3. Provide one piece flange covers fabricated to fit over wall anchors and fixed by means of not less than three set screws. 4. Fabricate bends in conformance with 36 CFR Part 1191. 5. Stainless Steel: Either 302 or 304 L, 16 gauge (.064") minimum for 13" for 12" O.D. bars and 18 gauge (.050") minimum for V O.D. bars. 6. Finish: Satin finish. In addition, provide manufacturer's standard non -slip surface, either knurled or peened, over gripping surface of bars. 7. Attachment: concealed. 8. Construction: Provide one piece construction with ends returned to wall with integral intermediate supports as required. All joints shall be heliarc welded, ground and polished on exposed surfaces, finished to present uniform matching appearance throughout. 9. Anchors: Provide sub -anchors as required at each support, size and type as recommended by the manufacturer for each type of wall and finish condition. Support on drywall or plaster bases solely by means of toggle bolts is prohibited. C. Combination Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle (PTDWR) l . Fabricate as single framed unit containing upper paper towel dispenser and lower waste �- receptacle compartment with each concealed behind lockable door. 2. Fabricate cabinet and frame of not less than 0.0312-inch stainless steel with 1 inch frame face and 1/4 inch return to wall. 3. Fabricate doors of not less than 0.0500 inch stainless steel. D. Mirrors 1. Fabricate with 18 gauge stainless steel angle frame with seamless square mitered corners, v welded and ground smooth. 2. Provide 20 gauge galvanized steel back and 18 gauge cold rolled steel hangar, all welded construction. E. Sanitary Napkin and Tampon Disposer (SND) 1. Fabricate body and lid from not less than 0.0312-inch stainless steel and back from not less than 0.0250-inch stainless steel. 2. Fabricate lid with integral slope to front and integral handle. 3. Fabricate with bottom service door equipped with tumbler lock. F. Soap Dispenser (SD) 1. Fabricate from not less than 0.0375-inch stainless steel. 2. Fabricate with clear non -breakable plastic fill level indicator and key type fill cover. 3. Valve: All purpose liquid type, chrome plated brass valve body and stainless steel valve mechanism with integral check valve. G. Towel Pin (TP) 1. Fabricate post from not less than 0.0312-inch stainless steel with 0.0781-inch rectangular hook welded continuously to post. 2. Fabricate with separate mounting bracket and snap -on stainless steel escutcheon with concealed set screw. H. Shower Seats 1. Frame: Fabricated of 1" diameter type 304 (18-8), 18 gauge stainless steel tubing. Heliarc welded. 2. Wall Bracket: Fabricated of 16 gauge stainless steel with stainless steel piano hinges. �. 03879400 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 4 07/02 - Interior Renovation 3. Retaining Bracket: Fabricated of 11 gauge stainless steel. Positive bullet -type catch holds seat securely in up or down position. 4. Seat: White reinforced vinyl fabric over 2 inch thick foam mounted on 1/2 inch thick marine grade plywood. 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A. Galvanizing: ANSFASTM A123, A386 to 1.25 oz/sq. yd. B. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake. C. Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats epoxy electrostatic baked enamel. D. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ANSFASTM B456, Type SC 2 satin polished finish. a E. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough -in frames to site at appropriate time for building -in. B. Provide templates and rough -in measurements as required. C. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. j B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Install grab bars in conformance with performance requirements specified. 03879400 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 5 07/02 — Interior Renovation 3.4 SCHEDULE A. Toilet Accessories Men 130 Women 131 Men 144 Women 146 Toilet 202 Toilet 109 Toilet tissue dispenser (TTD) 2 3 2 3 1 1 Paper towel dispenser (PTD) 1 1 1 1 1 1 Soap dispenser (SD) 1 1 1 1 1 1 Sanitary Napkin disposal (SND) 1 1 Mirror (MM) 1 1 1 1 1 1 Grab Bars (GB) 2 2 2 2 2 2 END OF SECTION 03879400 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 6 07/02 — Interior Renovation r SECTION 15000 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SPECIAL NOTE A. The Architectural and Structural Plans and Specifications, including the supplements issued thereto, Information to Bidders, and other pertinent documents issued by the Architect, are a part of these specifications and the accompanying mechanical and electrical plans, and shall be complied with in every respect. All the above is included herewith, will be issued separately or is on file at the Architect's office, and shall be examined by all bidders. Failure to comply shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility or be used as a basis for additional compensation due to omission of drawings. Where the Supplementary General Conditions conflict with the General Conditions, the Supplementary General Conditions shall govern. 1.2 CHECKING DOCUMENTS A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. The Contractor shall check the drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the contract documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete contract documents. 1.3 GENERAL A. In general, the lines and ducts to be installed by the various trades under these specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of various lines and ducts and is to be 4q excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate deviating from these standards. B. All piping, conduit and ductwork for the mechanical and electrical trades shall be concealed in chases in finished areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal lines run in areas that have ceilings shall be run concealed in those ceilings, unless otherwise specifically indicated or directed. C. Piping, ductwork, conduits and raceways may be run exposed in machinery and equipment spaces, where serving as connections to motors and equipment items in finished rooms where exposed connections are required, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or required. D. All conduits in any space where they are exposed shall run parallel with the building walls. They shall enter the concealed areas perpendicular with the walls, ceilings or floors. Fittings shall be used where necessary to comply with this requirement. E. The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts in masonry walls while they are under construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction. 99075R GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 1 06/02 v F. The mechanical and electrical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and ducts, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to provide proper grading of fines, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation. G. The electrical plans show diagrammatically the locations of the various electrical outlets and apparatus and the method of circuiting and controlling them. Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections, and in all cases shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or apparatus before installation (within 10 feet of location shown on drawings) or after installation if an obvious conflict exists, without additional cost to the Owner. H. The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc. The exact location of each item shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections. Minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the site or as directed by the Architect shall be made without any additional cost accruing to the Owner. I. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. J. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the Architect before the work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds. K. Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, material, and conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The following order shall govern: 1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site. 2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewers. 3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. 4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. L. Piping, ducts, and conduits serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner. M. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment. N. The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any item required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. 99075R GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 2 06/02 a 0. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under Division 15 or 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective "M", "P" & "E" drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the specifications. 1.4 DIMENSIONS A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, including elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work. '_ 1.5 INSPECTION OF SITE N A. The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing mechanical and electrical installations. The bidders for the work under these sections of the specifications shall inspect the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the present building and underground serving to and from that structure. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing installations and/or installing any new work. 1.6 ELECTRICAL WIRING A. All electric wiring of every character, both for power supply, for pilot and control, for temperature control, for communications, etc. will be done under Division 16 of these specifications. The Contractor for each section shall erect all his motors in place ready for connections. The Contractor, under Division 16, shall mount all the starters and controls, furnishing the supporting structures and any required outlet boxes. B. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished by the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern. 1.7 MOTORS AND CONTROLS 99075R 06/02 A. All motors furnished under any of the several sections of these specifications shall be of recognized manufacture, of adequate capacity for the loads involved and wound for the current characteristics shown on the electrical drawings. All motors shall conform to the standards of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association as shown in their latest publications. They shall further be listed by Underwriters Laboratories B. Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor under Division 15 shall furnish each motor with a starter and all controls of the types specified or required. These starters shall be of the totally enclosed type, of capacity rating within the required limits of the motors which they are to serve, shall be suitable for the motor current characteristics and shall provide thermal overload protection. All starters shall be standard of GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 3 manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association. They further shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Provide overload protection in each phase wire. 1.8 PROGRESS OF WORK A. The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the progress of the work and do his work at the proper time without waiting for notification from the Architect or Owner. 1.9 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS A. All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.10 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free from defects. All materials of a type for which the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. have established a standard shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear their label. B. Wherever the make of material or apparatus required is not definitely specified, the Contractor shall submit a sample to the Architect before proceeding. C. The Architect reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered in substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the Architect's opinion, the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an evaluation of the two materials may be better made by visual inspection. This shall be limited to lighting fixtures, wiring devices, plumbing brass, grilles, registers, ceiling outlets and similar items and shall not be applicable to major manufacturers' items of equipment. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to and on the job, and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of these materials and work until the final acceptance of the job. E. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and appurtenances of all kinds, and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of his contract. F. The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and all construction shall be done according to the best practice of the trade. 1 .11 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS A. Where a definite material or only one manufacturer's name is mentioned in these specifications, it has been done in order to establish a standard. The product of the particular manufacturer mentioned is of satisfactory construction and any substitution must be of quality as good as or better than the named article. No substitution shall be made without review by the Architect, who will be the sole judge of equality. B. Within 30 days of being awarded the Contract for any section or sections of the work under this heading, the Contractor shall submit for approval a complete list of the materials he proposes to use. This list shall give manufacturers' names and designations corresponding to each and every item and the submission shall be accompanied by complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data, drawings, etc., necessary to give full and complete details. If the material is not submitted within 30 days of the contract signing, the Contractor shall furnish the specified materials. _. 99075R GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 4 06/02 11 f C. Should a substitution be accepted under the provisions of the conditions of these specifications, and should this substitute prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service for which it is intended within the guarantee period, the Contractor who originally requested the substitution shall replace the substitute material with the specified material. 1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Wherever shop drawings are called for in these specifications, they shall be furnished by the Contractor for the work involved after review by the Architect as to the make and type of material and in sufficient time so that no delay or changes will be caused. This is done in order to facilitate progress on the job and failure on the part of the Contractor to comply shall render him liable to stand the expense of any and all delays, changes in construction, etc., occasioned by his failure to provide the necessary details. Also, if the Contractor fails to comply with this provision, the Architect reserves the right to go directly to the manufacturer he selects and secure any details he might deem necessary and should there be any charges in connection with this, they shall be borne by the Contractor. B. Shop drawings will be reviewed by the Architect for general compliance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Review by the Architect and any action by the Architect in marking shop drawings is subject to the requirements of the entire contract documents. Contractor will be held responsible for quantities, dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of all trades and the satisfactory performance of his work. C. Shop drawings submitted shall not consist of manufacturers' catalogues or tear sheets therefrom that contain no indication of the exact item offered. Rather, the submission of individual items shall designate the exact item offered and shall clearly identify the item with the project. D. All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time and shall consist of a bound catalogue of all shop drawings under each section, properly indexed and certified that they have been checked by the Contractor. E. The omissions of any material from the shop drawings which has been shown on the contract drawings or specified, even though reviewed by the Architect, shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and erecting same. 1.13 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS A. The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect his new apparatus from damage. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters to adequately protect any apparatus stored in the open on the site, the cribbing of any apparatus above the floor of the construction, and the covering of apparatus in the incompleted building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the entire satisfaction of the Architect will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the pieces of apparatus in question. 1.14 PERMITS, FEES, ETC A. The Contractor under each section of these specifications shall arrange for a permit from the local authority. The Contractor shall arrange for all utility services, including sewer, water, gas and electric services as applicable. If any charges are made by any of the utility companies due to the work on this project, the Contractor shall pay these charges, including charges for metering, connection, street cutting, etc. The 99075R GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 5 r, 06/02 Contractor shall pay for any inspection fees or other fees and charges required by ordinance, law, codes and these specifications. 1.15 TESTING A. The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform the various tests as specified and required by the Architect and as required by the State and local authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests. 1 .16 LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES A. All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national codes, ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as m interpreted by the inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit those requirements. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Architect, shall prepare any supplemental drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and, on approval, make the changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various portions of the work the installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance. 1.17 TERMINOLOGY A. Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install," "provide and install", and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division of the Specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to the contrary. B. Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called for, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the material. C. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract. ✓ D. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs. E. "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period. F. In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items. 1.18 COOPERATION AND CLEANING UP A. The contractor for the work under each section of these specifications shall coordinate " his work with the work described in all other sections of the specifications to the end that, as a whole, the job shall be a finished one of its kind, and shall carry on his work in such a manner that none of the work under any section of these specifications shall be handicapped, hindered or delayed at any time. B. At all times during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall keep the premises clean and free of unnecessary materials and debris. The Contractor shall, on direction at any time from the Architect, clear any designated areas or area of materials and debris. On completion of any portion of the work, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all tools and machinery and all debris occasioned by the work, leaving the premises free of all obstructions and hindrances. c� 99075R GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 6 06/02 u 1.19 COORDINATION OF TRADES A. The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving all coordination required between trades. For example, items furnished under Division 15 which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location 7. Control devices and details B. Items furnished under various sections which require plumbing connections shall be coordinated for services, pressure, size and location of connections, type of fuel, clearances for service, auxiliary devices required, etc. C. Items requiring insulation shall be fully insulated and that insulation shall be checked against manufacturer's directions and job requirements for suitability, coverage, thickness and finish. D. Items installed in/on finished ceilings shall be coordinated with the ceiling construction. The Contractor under each section shall conform to the reflected ceiling plan and shall secure details and/or samples of the ceiling materials as necessary to insure compatibility. Any device not conforming to this requirement shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. E. All items specified under Divisions 15 and 16 shall be installed tight, plumb, level, square and symmetrically placed in relation to the work of other trades. 1.20 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor for work specified under each section shall perform all structural and general construction modifications and cut all openings through either roof, walls, floors or ceilings required to install all work specified under that section or to repair any defects that appear up to the expiration of the guarantee. All of this cutting shall be done under the supervision of the Architect and the Contractor shall exercise due diligence to avoid cutting openings larger than required or in wrong locations. Verify the scope of this work at the site and in cooperation with all other trades before bidding. B. No cutting shall be done to any of the structural members that would tend to lessen their strength, unless specific permission is granted by the Architect to do such cutting. C. The Contractor for work under each section shall be responsible for the patching of all -openings cut to install the work covered by that section and to repair the damage resulting from the failure of any part of the work installed hereunder. D. Before bidding, the Contractor shall review and coordinate the cutting and patching required under the respective section with all trades. E. In all spaces where new work under Division 15 and 16 is installed and no other alteration or refinishing work is shown or called for, existing floors, walls and ceilings shall be restored to match existing conditions. All cutting and patching shall be done by workmen skilled in the affected trade. F. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, the Contractor under each respective section shall provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry and adequate support shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc. shall be of the size, shape, and installed as directed by the Architect. 99075R GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 7 06/02 1.21 PAINTING A. Painting for Divisions 15 and 16 shall be as follows: 1. If the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched up and then given one coat of half -flat -half -enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces. 2. Paint all exposed pipe, conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and supports, and miscellaneous metal. 3. Paint all exposed sheet metal. 4. Paint all insulated surfaces exposed to view, including piping, equipment, etc. Surfaces until a smooth, non grainy surface is obtained. B. Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no exposed bare metal or insulation surface is visible. 1.22 SEALING A. The Contractor installing pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., shall seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where they pierce walls, partitions or floors by packing fire resistant rope and fire resistant cement. The packing shall effect a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., pierce walls, floors or partitions. 1.23 OWNERS OCCUPANCY A. It shall be understood that the building in which the work is to be done is a necessary part of the Owner's operation, and shall continue in use throughout the construction period without interruption. Take all precautions required by the Owner for the ..� protection of his equipment and property. B. Contractor shall cooperate with the owner in scheduling areas in which work is permitted. Owners schedule will govern. 1.24 SCHEDULE OF WORK A. Under no condition shall any work be done in the present building that would interfere with its natural use during its normal hours of occupancy, unless special permission is granted by the Owner. This is particularly applicable where new connections are to be made to present lines or items of equipment in that building or where present equipment items in that building are to be relocated or modified in any way. The Contractor shall include this scheduling requirement in his proposal as no additional compensation for overtime work will be granted. 1.25 WORKING TIME A. Where new connections are to be made into existing lines, present lines must be relocated or rerouted, present equipment items relocated or other work accomplished that would affect the operation of the present building, the work shall be carried on at such times as to cause a minimum of interference with the normal operation of that building. In certain cases the work may be accomplished during normal working hours during certain designated seasons or times of the year. In other cases the work may have to be executed during times of the day outside of the normal working period, on holidays, etc. Each individual case presents a separate decision as to the time during which it shall be performed. The Contractor involved shall present each case to the Architect for his decision, which will be made after due consultation with the Owner. 99075R GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 8 06/02 No additional compensation for overtime will be granted for compliance with these requirements. 1.26 RELOCATION OF EXISTING INSTALLATION A. There are portions of the existing plumbing system, heating, ventilating and air conditioning system and electrical System which shall remain in use to serve the finished building in conjunction with the indicated new installations. By actual examination at the site, each bidder shall determine those portions of the remaining f:= present installations which must be relocated to avoid interferences with the installations of new work of his particular trade and that of all other trades. All such existing installations which interfere with new installations shall be relocated by the Contractor under the Division in which the existing material normally belongs, and in a manner as directed by the Architect. For example: 1. Existing Plumbing piping, etc. shall be relocated under Division 15 where it interferes with the installation of new work. 2. Where existing piping, ductwork, etc. interferes with the installation of new work, it shall be relocated under Division 15. 3. Where existing conduit and electrical equipment interferes with the installation of �., new work, it shall be relocated under Division 16. B. Failure to become familiar with the extent of the relocation work involved shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility and shall not be used as a basis for additional _ compensation. 1.27 EXISTING WASTE AND DRAIN LINE A. Special care and precaution shall be used where existing waste or drain lines are to be opened. The following procedure shall be adhered to at all times when opening existing waste or drain lines: Before opening, prepare a solution of one part household bleach to nine parts water. At every inlet to the affected piping run, add 2 gallons of the solution to flush out the piping. Any worker who has cuts or open skin breaks shall be prevented from working with the waste or drain piping. Workers shall wear approved face shields, gloves, aprons, boots, etc. for protection, In addition, existing piping shall be thoroughly washed inside and out with bleach solution prior to handling by unprotected persons. The safety director or Owner's representative shall be notified prior to commencing work on any existing waste or drain lines. 1.28 SALVAGE MATERIALS A. The Contractor shall remove existing equipment, piping, duct, grilles, conduit, wire, junction boxes, light fixtures and other items associated with the mechanical, r plumbing and electrical systems where shown on the drawings. Where such items are exposed to view or uncovered by any cutting or removal of general construction and , has no continuing function (as determined by the Architect), they shall be removed by the contractor under the section in which the item normally falls. B. Existing items (see above) where concealed in/above construction which is not disturbed, abandon in place. Plug, cap, disconnect or otherwise render harmless all such items. C. All items or materials removed from the project shall be made available for the Owner's inspection. The Owner retains the option to claim any item or material. Contractor shall deliver any claimed item or material in good condition to the place designated by the Owner. All item not claimed become the property of the contractor and shall be removed from the site. 99075R GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 9 06/02 1.29 SLEEVE DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall, before concrete is poured, prepare 1 /8" scale floor plan drawings on tracing paper and shall show on these drawings, with dimension lines, the size and location of every pipe sleeve required for the passage of his lines. Prints shall be reviewed by the Architect prior to the setting of the pipe sleeves. 1.30 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS A. It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the Architect to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use. B. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided to the Architect for his information. 1.31 ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT A. The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these specifications. The Contractor under each section of the specifications shall rough -in for the exact item to be furnished on the job, whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. The Contractor shall refer to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of the required equipment connections for the Owner furnished equipment. B. Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature different from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Architect and finally connect as directed by the Architect. C. Should any shop drawings not be available for equipment furnished under other contracts or by the Owner, the Contractor under each section of these specifications shall bid the work as detailed on the drawings. D. Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the drawings will not constitute ground for additional payment to the Contractor. 1.32 MARKING OF PIPE A. The Contractor shall mark all accessible piping systems. The identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the material content of the system by lettered legend, giving the name of the content in full or abbreviated form. This mark shall be conspicuously placed at frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow. Markers shall be painted on using stencils. B. Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, at each pump, and on each drop to an outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at _ intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a room and 25 feet when installed above removable ceilings, except that no exposed line shall enter a room without being identified therein. Marker on lines above removable ceilings shall be applied on the undersides of the lines and in other areas shall be applied to be most visible. Also supply directional flow indicators adjacent to identification markers. 99075R GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 10 06/02 C. Size of Identification: Outside Diameter Size of Legend of Pipe or Covering Letters - (" Height) 3/4 to 1-1/4 1-1/2 to 2 2-1/2 to 6 1/2 3/4 1-1/4 1.33 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING A. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. The item of equipment shall indicate the same number as shown on the drawings. For example, pumps will be identified as P-1, P-2, P-3, etc.; exhaust fans will be EF-1, EF-2, etc.; AC Units will be AC-1, AC-2, etc. B. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1 /16" thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1 /2" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Boilers 2. Chillers 3. Pumps 4. AC Units 5. Convertors 6. Air Conditioning Control Panels and Switches 7. Exhaust and Return Air Fans 8. Miscellaneous - similar and/or related items 1.34 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. The Contractor for each section of the work hereunder shall, in cooperation with the representatives of the manufacturers of the various equipment items, carefully instruct the Owner's representatives in the proper operation of each item of equipment and of each system. During the balancing and adjusting of systems, the Owner's representative shall be made familiar with all procedures. 1.35 OPERATING MANUALS A. Prepare and submit 3 copies of the operating manuals bound in hard covers. Three weeks prior to completion of the work, the Architect will check the manuals and any additional material necessary to complete the manuals shall be furnished and inserted by the Contractor. B. Manuals shall contain the following data: 1. Catalogue data of all equipment. 2. Shop drawings of all equipment. 3. Temperature control drawings (reduced in size) 4. Start-up instructions for major equipment. 5. Trouble shooting procedures for major equipment. 99075R GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 11 06/02 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment. 8. Parts list for all items. 9. Name and address of each vendor. 1.36 GUARANTEE A. Unless a longer period is specified elsewhere, the contractor shall guarantee all workmanship and materials for a period of one year from date of final acceptance. 1.37 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS A. Before acceptance and final payment the Contractor under each Division of the specifications shall furnish: 1. Accurate "as built" drawings, shown in red ink on blue line prints furnished for that purpose all changes from the original plans made during installation of the work. Drawings shall be filed with the Architect when the work is completed. 2. All manufacturers' guarantees. 3. All operating manuals. 4. Guarantees. 5. Test and Balance Report. 1.38 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR FINAL INSPECTION A. Before calling for the final inspection, the Contractor under each Division shall carefully inspect his work to be sure it is complete and according to plans and specifications. END OF SECTION 99075R GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 12 06/02 SECTION 15300 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. 1.4 INSPECTION A. All pipe, valves, fittings, and other accessories shall be inspected upon delivery and during the course of the work. Any defective materials found during field inspection or during hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be removed from the site of the work and replaced by the Contractor. 1.5 PROTECTION DURING STORAGE A. The interior of all pipe, fittings, and other accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter at all times. Valves and fittings shall be drained and stored in a manner that will protect them from damage by freezing. PART 2 PRODUCTS u 2.1 MATERIALS A A. All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in the United States of America. B. 'Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections for materials to be used under that section. The following tabulation is for reference only to identify the applicable standard. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM A74, Class SV Push On Gaskets for C.I. Soil Pipe ASTM C564 Caulked Joints for C.I. Soil Pipe Fed. Spec. HH-P-117 Type II No Hub Joints ASTM D3183 '-� Clay Tile Pipe and Fittings ASTM C700 Clay Tile Joints ASTM C425 Rubber Rings for A.C. Pipe ASTM D1869 99075R PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 1 06/02 ABS Soil Pipe and Fittings ABS Soil Joints — Elastomeric PVC Soil Pipe and Fittings PVC Soil Fittings — Elastomeric Copper Tubing Wrought Copper Solder Fittings Cast Bronze Solder Fittings Steel Pipe Butt Weld Fittings Socket Weld Fittings Steel Flanges Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Cast Iron Water Pipe Cement Lining for C.I. Water Pipe Cast Iron Water Pipe Fittings, Lined Push -On Joints for C.I. Water Pipe Mechanical Joints for Water Pipe ASTM D2751 ASTM D2751 ASTM D3034, Type PSM Max. SDR = 35 ASTM D3212 ASTM B88 ANSI B16.22 ANSI B16.18 ASTM A120, A53, A106 ANSI B16.9 ANSI B16.11 ANSI B16.5 ANSI B16.3 Fed. Spec. WW-P-501 E ANSI A21.6 ANSI A21 .4 ANSI A21.10 and A21.10a ANSI A21.1 1 ANSI A21 .1 1 PVC Water Pipe ASTM D1584 Type 1120 Push On Joints for PVC Water Pipe ASTM D1585, AWWA C900 Asbestos Cement Water Pipe AWWA C400 Class 150 AC Water Pipe Fittings ANSI A21.10, 150 lb. AC Water Pipe Joints ASTM D1869 Flange Bolt, Sets ASME Pressure Piping C. Unions in Ferrous Lines: 150 pound malleable iron, screwed pattern, ground joint with brass to iron seat; equal to Crane. D. Insulating Fittings: Equal to Maloney. E. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, screwed pattern, ground joint, equal to Chase, Crane or Mueller. F. Mechanical Couplings: Victaulic Style 77 2.2 VALVES A. General Service Valves: 3" and smaller, all bronze, screwed; 3-1/2" and larger, flanged, iron body, bronze trimmed, equal to the following Crane Nos: Type Fluid Pressure Fluid Pressure Below 125 PSIG Above 125 PSIG Gate 3" and smaller 428 424 Gate 3-1 /2" and larger 465-1 /2 7-1/2 E Globe 3" and smaller 1 14-1 /2 P Globe 3-1 /2" and larger 351 21 E Angle 3" and smaller 2 16-1 /2 P Angle 3-1/2" and larger 353 23E 99075R PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 2 06/02 B. Where valves have discs, select the discs for the intended service using materials as recommended by the valve manufacturer. Provide extended stems for valves in insulated lines, so that the handle clears the insulation and jacket. C. Acceptable General Service Valve Manufacturers: Stockham, Jenkins, OIC, Walworth, Hammond. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The location, direction and size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings. B. Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained materials and to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the building and work into place without forcing or springing. Except as a required for specified grading, run all piping above ground parallel with the lines of the building. C. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no long screws or bushings. D. Install and support piping systems with loops, bends, expansion joints and/or flexible connectors as required for flexibility, to accommodate expansion and contraction of piping due to temperature changes in the contained fluids and in the surrounding space, and to minimize the transmission of vibration to the building structure. E. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper ;= connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material. F. In piping systems assembled by welding, use factory -fabricated welding fittings of the same material and the same schedule or weight as the piping in which they are ` installed, except that branches or take -offs of sizes not exceeding 2/3 of the nominal diameter of the mains may be made with Bonney Weldolets or Thredolets. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of straight runs to form tees, and any similar construction will not be permitted. G. In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method c=- of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials. r; 3.2 FLASHING A. Flash around all pipes passing through the roof with sheet lead not less than 4 lbs. per square foot, built a minimum of 8" in all directions from the outside of the pipe into the waterproofing. Flashing shall be run up the pipe and turned over into the pipe cavity. Flashing at roof drains shall be 36" square. 3.3 PITCH PANS A. Small lines thru the roof shall be installed thru mastic pans. Pans shall be 18 gage galvanized, Welded, 3" deep, 8" X 8" or larger and filled with mastic. 99075R PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 3 06/02 3.4 PIPE SLEEVES A. Generally where pipes pass through walls or floors except sewer pipes through floors on grade, pipe sleeves shall be used. The sizes of these sleeves shall be such as to permit readily the subsequent insertion of the pipes of the proper size. In the case of insulated lines, the diameter of the sleeves shall be approximately 1 /2 inch greater than the outside diameter of the insulation. B. The pipes passing through interior walls or floors shall pass through galvanized pipe sleeves. In walls, they shall finish flush with each finished surface. In pipe chases, they shall extend 1-1/2 inches above the floor slab. The annular space between the pipe and sleeve in floor penetrations and fire rated wall penetrations shall be fire -sealed with fire resistive material equal to Dow Corning Silicone RTV Foam Penetration Seal. C. The pipes passing through concrete beams or walls, and masonry exterior walls and through floors shall be provided with galvanized wrought iron pipe sleeves. Weld at least four No. 4 rods to each pipe sleeve to serve as an anchor as directed by the Architect. After the pipes are installed, in the case of pipes sleeving through exterior beams or walls and floors on grade, the Contractor shall fill the annular space between the pipe and its sleeve with mechanical interlocking synthetic rubber link equal to Link Seal. Contractor shall coordinate sleeve size to insure a watertight joint. 3.5 ESCUTCHEONS, CEILING PLATES A. Except as otherwise noted provide and install concealed hinge, chrome plated escutcheons or ceiling plates with spring catches around each pipe passing through any wall, floor, or ceiling in any space, except in underfloor and attic spaces. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly against the outside of the pipe, or against the outside of the insulation on lines which are insulated. B. No floor plates will be required around the iron pipe sleeves on exterior walls. 3.6 INTERIOR TRENCHING A. Trenches for underfloor lines inside the building shall be properly excavated, following in general the procedures set out for exterior lines. Where floors are to be poured over these lines, they shall be backfilled, tamped, and settled with water. B. Where necessary to cut floors for installation of underfloor lines, the floor shall be saw cut and patched back to a flush and level condition. C. All surplus materials removed in these trenching operations shall be disposed of as directed by the Architect. 3.7 FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS A. Cast Iron Pipes, Caulked Joints: Make joints in cast iron bell and spigot pipe by centering the spigot within the bell, packing the joint with oakum closely compacted, and then pouring the remaining space in the bell full of molten lead. When the lead has cooled, thoroughly caulk at least three times around the joint using caulking tools of the proper width. B. Threaded Pipes: Ream and deburr pipe after it is cut and before it is threaded. Stand each pipe on one end and hammer to remove all foreign material. Full cut threads, but not more than 3 pipe threads shall remain exposed when joint is completed. Make up joints with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks is prohibited. C. Welded Joints: Make all welded joints by the metallic arc process. Use base material conforming to ANSI B31.1 for welded pipe ASTM A106 and ASTM A53. Use filler material conforming to ASTM A233 and in accordance with ANSI B31.1. Machine the 99075R PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 4 06/02 r ends of the material to be joined or gas cut. Make the cut smooth in order that good fit can be made and a full penetration weld made. Use direct current for welding with the electrode positive. Limit the depth of deposit to 1 /8" per pass. Remove all slag or flux remaining on any bead of welding before laying down the next successive bead of welding. Remove any cracks or blow holes that appear on the surface of any bead of welding by chipping or grinding before depositing the next successive bead of welding. D. Mechanical Couplings: Mechanical couplings and fittings shall be used to connect - mechanical equipment and piping systems where specified. Rigid couplings shall have angle -pad design equal to Victaulic Style 07, Zero -Flexible. Couplings shall be equal to ., Victaulic Style 77 where system flexibility is desired. Couplings shall be cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12 or malleable iron conforming to ASTM A-47, Grade 32510. Gaskets shall be Grade "E" EPDM compound conforming to ASTM D-2000 designation 2CA615A25B24F17Z. Coupling bolts shall be Zinc plated (ASTM-B-633) heat -treated carbon steel track head conforming to - physical properties of ASTM A-183. Unless specifically designated otherwise on the drawings, all couplings shall be flexible type at pump connections and in Mechanical ?= Rooms. k. E. Pipe Fittings shall be cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, or malleable iron conforming to ASTM A-47, Grade 32510. Where malleable fitting .. pattern is not available, fittings fabricated from Schedule 40 steel pipe or standard wall seamless weld fittings with grooved ends may be used. F. Before assembly of couplings, lightly coat gasket with lubricant to facilitate installation. *, G. Pipe grooving shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications contained in the latest published literature. H. Flanged Joints: Flanged joints shall be made using bolts and gaskets as specified. Faces of the flanges shall be cleaned of all dirt, rust or other foreign matter. The pipe, valve, or fitting shall be properly aligned and free to move while bolting, and the bolts shall be gradually tightened at a uniform rate around the entire flange. No strain shall be put on the flanges in making up the joint. 3.8 REVISIONS AND RELOCATION OF EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Where conflicts occur between the new work and the existing piping systems which cannot be resolved, the Contractor shall relocate the existing piping system. Relocated positions of piping shall be tested for new work. All piping systems shall be free from leaks. 3.9 REPAIR OF LEAKS A. All leaks in piping systems shall be corrected as follows: 1. Repair leaks in solder joints by remaking the joint; no soldering or brazing over existing joints will be permitted. 2. Repair leaks in screwed joints by tightening the joint; remake the joint if the tightening fails to stop the leak. 3. Leaks in caulked joints may be stopped by additional caulking of the joint; but if that fails, remake the joint. 4. Repair leaks in welded joints by removing the defective weld completely through the base metal and grind smooth. Re -weld, accomplishing 100% penetration of the base metal. The repair weld should in no case be less than 4" in length. B. When any defect is repaired, retest that section of the system. 99075R PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 5 06/02 3.10 HANDLING OF MATERIAL A. Hauling: All materials furnished by the Contractor shall be delivered and distributed at the site by the Contractor. B. Loading and Unloading: Pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be loaded or unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe already on the ground. Each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be installed. No material shall be unloaded where it will block any road, drive, building entrance, or walkway or where it will be a hazard to safe vehicular or pedestrian traffic. C. Care of Pipe Coating and Lining: Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining shall not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense. If satisfactory repair cannot be made, the Contractor shall replace the damaged pipe. 3.11 ALIGNMENT AND GRADES A. General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves, at the required locations; spigots centered in bells; and all valve stems plumb. All pipe shall be installed straight and true to line. B. Deviations Occasioned by Other Structures: Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work, the lines and/or grades shall be adjusted so to not interfere with existing obstructions. END OF SECTION 99075R PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 6 06/02 r- SECTION 15310 PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL lick 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment, labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of the plumbing systems. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". A. Interior Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: Except as otherwise specified or noted on the drawings, piping inside of, under and within 10'0" of the building or other structures shall be bell and spigot, service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, each heavily coated at the factory with asphaltum or coal tar pitch and each having the manufacturer's mark or name and the date of manufacture cast on it. Type "L" copper in sizes up to 2" may be used where space is restricted. C.I. joints may be d-- caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used, unless otherwise prohibited. B. Sump Pump Discharge Pipe: Standard weight galvanized steel assembled using screwed fittings until they turn down and connect into the collection barrel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ISOLATION VALVES A. The water supplies to each group of fixtures shall have an isolating valve in each line serving the riser. These isolation valves shall be installed at an accessible location. Where these valves are not accessible thru removable ceilings or otherwise, provide access doors in the ceiling or chase. "{ 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Refer to PIPING AND ACCESSORIES for requirements for installing pipes. In addition, the following specifications shall apply. 1. Drain Lines and Sanitary Waste: Grade down toward the sewer connection at a uniform slope of 1 /4" per toot to serve individual fixtures or not less than 1 /8" per 99075R PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15310 - 1 06/02 foot to serve multiple stacks or outlets. Slope shall be greater where possible and shall never be less than required to produce a flow velocity of 2 feet per second. 1;a 3.3 EXISTING WASTE AND DRAIN LINE A. Special care and precaution shall be used where existing waste or drain lines are to be opened. The following procedure shall be adhered to at all times when opening existing waste or drain lines: Before opening, prepare a solution of one part household bleach to nine parts water. At every inlet to the affected piping run, add 2 gallons of the solution to flush out the piping. Any worker who has cuts or open skin breaks shall be prevented from working with the waste or drain piping. Workers shall wear approved face shields, gloves, aprons, boots, etc. for protection. In addition, existing piping shall be thoroughly washed inside and out with bleach solution prior to handling by unprotected persons. The safety director or Owner's representative shall be notified prior to commencing work on any existing waste or drain lines. 3.4 TESTING A. Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or chases, insulated, painted, or otherwise covered up or rendered inaccessible. Accomplish testing by sections of lines or systems, as required by conditions during construction. Clean all piping and equipment before testing. END OF SECTION 99075R PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15310 - 2 06/02 SECTION 15400 AIR DISTRIBUTION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of apparatus casing, ductwork, plenums, linings, air distribution devices, dampers and control devices, relief air vents, curbs and other materials and accessories as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. B. In addition, connect all air conditioning units, automatic dampers, filters and all other materials and install (and/or cooperate in the installation with other trades) those various items of equipment and materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK r'. A. Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of the specifications, and/or noted on the drawings, low pressure ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets in accordance with the recommended construction for low pressure ducts insofar as gauges of metal to be used, bracing of joints and joint construction as established in the latest edition of the ASHRAE HANDBOOK. B. Duct construction details shall conform to "HVAC Duct Construction Standards", 1st Edition, (1985) published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). Refer to the fan schedules (TSP) for system pressures. Construction shall be suitable for actual duct system pressures. C. Make square elbows where shown or required, with double thickness i factory -fabricated turning vanes. Make all other changes in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct in the plane of the bend. D. Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes on all sides. Make increases in dimensions in the direction of airflow, with a maximum slope of 1 " in 7" on any side. Make decreases in dimensions in the direction of air flow preferably with a slope of 1 " in 7" on any side, but with a maximum slope of 1 " in 4" where conditions necessitate. ti E. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes, electrical conduits, ceiling hangers, etc. so as to avoid interferences insofar as possible. Where duct penetrations are unavoidable, provide streamline shaped sleeves around such material penetrations, t 99075R AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 1 06/02 made airtight at duct surfaces, except that such sleeves are not required at tie rods. Where obstructions are of a size to exceed 10% of the duct area, the duct shall be transformed to maintain the same duct area. 2.2 DUCT CONSTRUCTION TEST A. A trial leak test, as specified herein, shall be made after installation of the first section of each type of ductwork to demonstrate adequacy of the construction details. All testing shall be done in the presence of the Architect. B. Each test section shall incorporate at least five transverse joints and all typical fittings. C. Drawings showing all construction details of test sections, test procedures and instrumentation, and test results shall be submitted for record purposes. No additional ductwork shall be installed until the trial test installation described above has been approved. D. Low pressure duct shall be tested at 3 "w.c. Construction of low pressure systems shall be inherently airtight and leakage shall be of a sufficiently low magnitude as to be inaudible in quiet ambient and not detectable by sense of feel. 2.3 DUCT SEALER A. All supply air ductwork from the air unit to the terminal units shall be sealed to provide airtight construction. Metal surfaces to be joined shall be clean, dry and free of dirt or grease. Apply a heavy coat of Kingco Seal -Rite 18-120 to the interior metal surface of the slip joint, then interlock into place metal duct sections. Apply a heavy coat of 18-120 to the exterior metal surface duct joint, making sure any voids are filled to secure a continuous air pressure sealant. B. Allow sealant to dry a minimum of 48 hours before pressurizing system. 2.4 FLEXIBLE DUCT A. Flexible ducts shall be used for connecting air terminal devices. Generally flex duct shall not exceed 3'0" in length or have more than 90 degree of bend. Flexible duct shall be a factory fabricated assembly consisting of an inner sleeve, insulation and an outer moisture barrier. The inner sleeve shall be constructed of a continuous vinyl -coated spring steel wire helix fused to a continuous layer of fiber glass impregnated and coated with vinyl. A 1-1/4 inch thick insulating blanket of fiber glass wool shall encase the inner sleeve and be sheathed with an outer moisture barrier of a reinforced Mylar or neoprene laminate of low permeability. The flexible duct shall be rated for a maximum working velocity of 6000 FPM and shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories under their UL-181 standards as a Class 1 duct and shall comply with NFPA Standard #90A. The flexible duct shall be Thermaflex M-KC for high pressure and Thermaflex M-KE for low pressure application. 2.5 ROUND DUCT TAPS: A. All round takeoffs shall be made with spin -in type fittings for sheet metal duct or fiberglass ductboard as applicable. Provide each with a factory installed balancing r damper, positive locking nut and air scoop. 2.6 FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER A. Furnish and install a combination fire/smoke damper in all ducts penetrating fire/smoke partitions. Each combination fire and smoke damper shall meet all requirements specified elsewhere for fire dampers and additionally shall include an operating shaft 99075R AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 2 06/02 which, when rotated 90 degrees, causes damper to operate between closed and open. Operating shaft and damper combination shall be suitable for linking to and operation by a damper operator. Combination fire/smoke dampers shall be Ruskin type FSD-36, Class 11, 250 deg. F., 10 CFM/SF leakage @ 1 "SP for low pressure applications and Ruskin type FSD-60, Class I, airfoil blade, 4 CFM/SF @ 1 "SP for high pressure applications. B. Each combination fire/smoke damper shall be furnished complete with factory sleeve and damper operator factory installed on exterior of sleeve and properly linked to damper operating shaft. Actuator shall be of the spring return fail closed type that will close damper upon power interruption. Damper operators shall be UL listed as fire damper operators and bear the UL label for such. Blade edge seals shall be silicone rubber and galvanized steel mechanically locked into blade edge (adhesive or clip -on seals not acceptable). C. The smoke damper shall close on a signal from the fire alarm system or from the operator of a smoke detector. D. Provide access doors with ductports in the duct and a ceiling access door if necessary e for servicing the damper and actuator. E. Combination FD/SD shall be installed in all 1-hr or 2-hr walls shown on the architectural drawings. 2.7 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES A. Furnish and install all grilles, registers, and diffusers for every purpose. Refer to the tabulation on the drawings for types, sizes and accessories. B. All grilles, registers, and diffusers located in the ceiling shall be factory finished in OFF-WHITE. Door grilles shall be factory finished in baked enamel medium birch tan. All other grilles and registers shall be factory primed and spray painted 2 coats on the ` job. All grilles and registers shall be installed with tamperproof screws and shall be secured to the duct with a minimum of four screws. C. Where perforated supply grilles are scheduled, they shall be of the type with adjustable .-• curved blades in the neck of the diffusers. Other types are not acceptable. D. Air distribution devices as manufactured by Barber Colman, Titus, Tuttle and Bailey, Metal -Aire or Krueger will be acceptable. 99075R 06/02 r-� END OF SECTION AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 3 a�» SECTION 15500 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE �., A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and install all hangers, supports and isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be provided for the support of all piping and equipment. The following tabulation lists materials suitable for this duty. Equal materials manufactured by Fee and Mason, Carpenter -Patterson, Grinnell or Modern will be considered. MATERIAL SERVICE FEE AND MASON CAT. Hanger Copper Tubing 4" and Larger 364 copper plated Hanger Copper Tubing 3" and smaller 361 copper plated Hanger Steel Lines 3" and smaller 215 or 199 Hanger Steel lines 4" and larger 239 Hanger Outside Insulation -all lines 239 Hanger Cast Iron Lines 239 Hanger Plastic Pipe 108 + 109 Hanger Refrigerant Pipe 102 Hanger Glass Pipe 375 Wall Bracket All 150, 151, or 155 Saddles Steel Lines On Rollers 71, 1710, 1712, 172, 173 Conc. Inserts New Construction 185 Rollers Steel Piping 161,272 Pipe Clamps 2" and Smaller 304 Pipe Clamps 3" and Larger 241 Pipe Rest All 295 or 291 Exp Shield Concrete 374 Beam Clamps All 249, 254, 255, 282, 280 Adjuster All 2381 v 99075R HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 06/02 15500 - 1 2.2 HANGER RODS A. All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be supported by steel rods sized as follows: Rod Diameter 3/8" 1/2" 5/8" 3/4" 2.3 HANGER SPACING Size of Steel Pipe or Copper Tube Supported 2-1/2" and smaller 3" and 4" 5" through 8" 10" and larger Size of Cast Iron Pipe Supported 3" and smaller 4" through 6" 8" through 10" 12" and larger A. All hangers shall be so located as to properly support horizontal lines without appreciable sagging of these lines. The following table gives minimum spacing for copper, and steel lines, but hangers shall be more closely spaced where necessitated by conditions or the type of pipe involved or required by code. Size of Line 3/4" and smaller 1 " through 1-1 /2" 2" and larger All cast iron lines PART 3 EXECUTION Hanger Spacing in Feet 5 7 10 5 (Minimum two per joint) 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS A. All pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction, and the type of hanger, method of support, location of supports, etc. shall be governed in part by this consideration. Transmission of vibration and noise shall also be considered and any special suspension with vibration dampeners required to minimize transmissions shall be used where specified or required. B. All exposed vertical risers running near walls shall be supported from the walls. Each line shall have a minimum of 2 supports, not greater than 10'0" on centers, with the additional provision that there shall be a support near the top of the riser. All supports shall be aligned. C. All vertical pipes shall be supported with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and to adequately support their weight. At the bases of lines, where required for proper supports, furnish and install anchor base fittings or other approved supports. D. Where vertical lines run down to a point near the floor and a support is needed, they may be supported by means of a pipe leg welded to the pipe, extending down to the floor and terminating in a capped end resting on the floor. E. Where pipes other than those specified hereinbefore, are running along walls, they shall be supported using hangers as described hereinbefore, but suspended from brackets bolted to the wall. Specially fabricated clips or U-braces may be used where commercially manufactured items are not available in the proper size. 99075R HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15500 - 2 06/02 F. Where pipes run under steel construction, use beam clamps on beams. Under steel joists, piping may be suspended from rods thru the bottom chord with washers and double nuts. On piping larger than 4", verify the joist strength before installation. G. Where pipes or equipment are suspended under existing concrete construction, drill and use Grinnell Fig. 117 expansion case or Phillips concrete fasteners in sizes not exceeding 1 /2" and for loads of 200 Ibs or less. For larger rods or loads above 200 Ibs drill through the beam above the bottom steel and bolt a Grinnell Fig. 202 bracket to the side of the beam for support. Size brackets per manufacturer's recommendations. Use pipe stands where required. H. Where multiple lines are run horizontally at the same elevations and grades, they may be supported on trapezes formed for sections of Unistrut, angle iron, or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Trapeze members, including the suspension rods, shall be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Trapeze spacings shall be in accordance with the preceding table for the smallest line supported on or from the trapezes. I. Perforated strap iron and wire will under no circumstances be acceptable as hanger material. 3.2 DUCT HANGERS A. All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with standards published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. B. Pre -fabricated Equipment Mounting Supports: C. Provide ThyCurb equipment mounting supports, or approved equal of 18 ga. galvanized construction with continuously welded corner seams and a 3" cant, supports to be internally reinforced with a factory installed wood nailer and 18 ga. counterf lashing. Supports to be a minimum of 8" above the finished roof and of the style and design to mate the roof deck. D. Supports shall be level at the top, with pitch built into supports where roof slopes 3/8 of an inch per foot or more, and supports must have certified load bearing data. Supports must span a minimum of 2 joists and more if equipment length requires it. Supports to be used for all roof mounted equipment, HVAC units, condensing units and roof mounted piping. END OF SECTION r- 99075R HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 06/02 15500 - 3 r-- SECTION 15550 VIBRATION ISOLATION r�— PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE ;.� A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and install all vibration isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 ISOLATION A. Mechanical equipment and associated piping and ductwork shall be mounted on vibration isolators as specified and required to minimize transmission of vibrations and structure borne noise to building structure or spaces. B. All rotating equipment shall be balanced both statically and dynamically. The equipment supporting structure shall not have any natural frequencies within plus or minus 30% of the operating speeds. The equipment when mounted and placed in operation shall not exceed a self excited vibration velocity of 0.10" per second when measured with a vibration meter on the bearing caps of the machine in the vertical, horizontal and axial directions or measured at the equipment mounting feet if the bearings are concealed. C. Isolation shall be stable during starting and stopping of equipment without any traverse and eccentric movement of equipment that would damage or adversely affect the equipment or attachments. D. Isolation shall be selected for the lowest operating speed of equipment. E. Isolation shall be selected and located to produce uniform loading and deflection even if equipment weight is not evenly distributed. 2.2 FIBERGLASS ISOLATORS A. Fiberglass isolators shall consist of a high density matrix of precompressed molded glass fibers enclosed in a resilient neoprene jacket. Fiberglass isolators shall be equal to Consolidated Kinetics Corporation isolators. Isolators shall be selected for the actual loads of equipment served and generally shall be 90% efficient or better. r- 99075R VIBRATION ISOLATION 15550 - 1 06/02 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 VIBRATION ISOLATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPES AND DUCTS A. Furnish vibration isolation in accordance with the following: 1. Each pipe connected to equipment mounted on vibration isolators shall have a minimum of 3 spring hangers. 2. Hanger vibration isolators shall be selected for not less than the deflection provided for the equipment to which the piping is connected. The vibration isolator units selected shall accommodate the thermal movement of the piping systems. 3.2 SCHEDULE OF VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT PRIMARY ISOLATION SECONDARY ISOLATION PRV Type Fans Neoprene Pads END OF SECTION d 99O75R VIBRATION ISOLATION 15550 - 2 06/02 ro 0 SECTION 15600 INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of thermal insulation, coverings, jackets, supports, shields, etc. as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. All surfaces which may vary from the ambient temperature shall be insulated unless specifically excepted. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. In describing the various materials, application procedures, and finishes, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical applications. Also where the description is only general in nature, exact dimensions, arrangements and other data shall be determined by reference to plans, schedules, and details, including those provided by equipment manufacturers. B. Where materials are described under other sections of the specifications and are pertinent to this section, they shall be installed hereunder as though they were repeated herein. C. All insulation shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure NFPA 225, not exceeding flame spread 25, smoke developed 50. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cement, tape, cloth, etc. shall have these same component ratings. D. All materials installed under this section of the specifications shall be manufactured in the United States of America. 2.2 VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS 99075R 06/02 A. Factory -applied vapor -barrier jackets shall be laminated of flame resistant white kraft paper and .001 inch thick aluminum foil reinforced with glass fiber fabric between the foil and the paper. The foil and paper shall be adhered with a flame resistant latex adhesive. B. Where specified, insulate valves and fittings with two fiberglass inserts and preformed Manville "Zeston" covers with taped seams. INSULATION 15600 - 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The installation of all thermal insulation shall be performed by a recognized firm regularly engaged in the insulation business, using skilled insulation mechanics and using insulation materials which are the product of reputable manufacturer of the materials, using any special materials as required by these specifications and by those published standards. r B. Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be rejected and replaced. All coverings shall be smooth, flush, dressed to line and tight. Mastic shall be neatly applied and tooled. The Architect reserves the right to reject any insulation whose appearance he deems unacceptable. 3.2 APPLICATION OF INSULATION A. Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to be tight and accepted as such by the Architect. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be covered. B. On glass fiber pipe covering with factory -applied vapor -barrier jacket, lap the jacket on the longitudinal seams and seal with vapor barrier lap adhesive equal to Benjamin Foster 82-07 or use self sealing lap. Tightly butt the ends and cover butt joints with a 4" wide band of vapor barrier jacket secured with the same adhesive. C. Except where insulation is cloth jacketed, band all pipe insulation, following the completion of painting operations. Bands shall be aluminum not less than 3/4 inch wide. Space bands a maximum of 12" on centers, with three bands per section of covering. Where sections of insulation are overlapped as at flanges, apply a band at each of the overlapping sections and one on the basic line covering immediately adjacent to the end of the overlap. Provide bands also on each side of each valve, fitting, etc. and at the end terminal where the insulation is beveled off as specified herein. Also band the hanger shields on insulated cold lines with a band at each end of each shield. 3.3 INSULATION ON EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SYSTEMS A. The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for insulation and coverings. In the following, the word "exposed" shall apply to any line, duct, or other material or surface in any room above the lowest floor in any building unit, exterior to the building and above ground, and/or in equipment rooms; the word "concealed shall apply to any line, duct, or other material or surface in other underfloor areas, ceiling spaces furrings and chases. B. Also included in this section is the requirement for patching and repair of existing insulation where new connections are made. 1. Horizontal Storm Drains and Downspouts: Insulate with '/2" fiberglass with ASJ and vapor barrier seal. 2. Ducts: a Insulate the supply, return and fresh air ducts with 0.75 lb. density, 2" thick Manville "Microlite R Series" glass fiber flexible insulation having a factory applied FSKL vapor barrier jacket. b This insulation shall be secured, vapor barrier side out, to sheet metal. On horizontal runs, lap top and bottom sheets over edges of side pieces. Butt joints tightly. Except on ducts handling warm air only, seal all joints, punctures, breaks and fasteners with two coats of Benjamin Foster 30-35 99075R INSULATION 15600 - 2 06/02 99075R 06/02 adhesive. Embed three-inch wide Glassfab membrane in adhesive between coats. Install with not more than 25% compression in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. c Cover all joints, punctures and breaks with three-inch wide facing strip. d Ducts handling warm air only need not be vapor sealed. END OF SECTION INSULATION 15600 - 3 99075R 06/02 SECTION 15700 EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with the applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings on all items specified. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the mechanical equipment as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. This section requires the furnishing of all equipment specified and/or shown on the drawings. Equipment referred to singularly shall mean each item, and the total number of items shown or specified shall be furnished. All equipment shall be manufactured in the USA. C. All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the function of any specified item of equipment shall be furnished with the item of equipment, whether specifically mentioned or not. Each item of equipment shall perform the function for which it is intended, and all work necessary to provide a complete functional system shall be provided. D. This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely installed, finally connected, tested and placed in service. E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all requirements of the equipment and the contract and certify with the submittal of the shop drawings that all requirements have been met, including: 1. Space requirements 2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - no. and size) 3. Capacities 4. Clearance for maintenance 5. Quality 6. Quantity PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS A. Motors shall be furnished for all motor driven equipment. Motors with special operating conditions such as multiple speed or in hazardous locations shall be as specified under the equipment served. General service motors driving through flexible couplings or belts shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Less than 1/6 HP: Split phase, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0. Provide with inherent thermal overload protection. 15700 - 1 EQUIPMENT 2. Fractional larger than 1 /6 HP: Capacitor start, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0 or greater. Provide with inherent thermal overload protection. 3. Integral Horsepower, Single Phase: Capacitor type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.15. 4. Three Phase: High efficiency continuous duty squirrel cage type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or totally enclosed fan cooled as required by exposure with a service factor of 1.15. Power factor shall be 85% or greater. Motors shall be equal to Gould E-Plus. 2.2 MOTOR STARTERS A. The Division 15 Contractor shall furnish all motor starters (controllers) and control equipment for equipment specified under Division 15. The Contractor under this section of the specifications shall be responsible for coordinating starter sizes, characteristics, heater element sizes and all other details. All starters shall be combination starter/disconnect devices, and shall include control and transformers. B. All individual starters shall be the product of a single manufacturer and submitted for review at the same time. C. Where starters are specified with items of equipment, the starters shall be factory mounted and wired. D. Magnetic Starters (Full Voltage): Starters shall be individual units, combination starter/molded case circuit breaker units, combination starter/fused disconnect switch units or combination starter/unfused disconnect switch units unless otherwise indicated. E. Units shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse, Federal or Gould manufacture with the proper enclosures. F. Provide pilot lights and either pushbutton stations or hand -off -automatic switches as required for the control of each item of equipment. Generally, pushbutton stations shall be used only where no interlock or remote functions are specified. Control devices shall be in the starter cover unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide auxiliary contacts on starters to accomplish interlocks and control as specified. Starter disconnecting means shall have auxiliary contacts to disconnect all control circuits when the starter is disconnected. H. Provide all three phase starters with three overload elements, one per phase. I. Equip each starter unit with a control power transformer, with 120 volt secondary, a secondary fuse in one leg and the other secondary leg grounded. _ J. Manual Starters: Where manual starters are indicated, they shall consist of a horsepower rated on -off switch, or hand -off -auto switch with a pilot light and overload element(s) in the same enclosure. Where the starter is installed in public areas, it shall be in a recessed box with a stainless steel coverplate. 2.3 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS— SINGLE ZONE A. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings, complete summer -winter rooftop mounted air conditioning units as shown and scheduled on the drawings and as herein specified. Lennox, Carrier, General Electric or Trane units will be acceptable. Units must be of the same manufacture as indicated on the nameplate. B. Equipment: Each basic unit shall be completely factory assembled and test ran before shipment. Roof mounting frame and thermostat shall be separately furnished and installed on this job. C. The size of the complete unit shall not exceed those indicated on the scale drawings. If supply and return air connections require duct modifications from that shown on the 99075R EQUIPMENT 15700 - 2 06/02 r drawings, the Contractor shall submit revised drawings for the Architect's review before installation. D. All electrical components shall carry the Underwriters' Laboratories Label. E. Cabinet Construction: All components of each unit shall be contained in a single weatherproof casing. The cabinet shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel. Exterior panels shall have a durable finish coat of outdoor, acrylic enamel. Basic unit shall occupy the entire roof curb assembly. F. All exterior panels of the conditioned air portion of each unit shall be lined with 1 " thick fiberglass insulation. In addition the entire bottom of the unit shall be insulated ►� with fiberglass. G. Hail Guard Screen: Entire condenser coil shall be covered with 18 gauge, 1 /2" mesh galvanized wire screen. H. Heating Section: Natural gas heating capacity as scheduled on the drawings shall be r , furnished in the unit. Burners using 100% secondary air shall be furnished and operation shall not be affected by wind or atmospheric conditions. Burners shall have dual limits and 100% safety shut-off. High voltage ignition and re -ignition and all necessary operating and safety controls shall be furnished. Standing pilots are not acceptable. Heat exchangers on all sizes of units shall be constructed of aluminized steel. r, I. Entire unit shall be AGA approved for firing with entering air at any temperature. J. Heat exchanger shall be warranted for a period of ten years. K. Cooling Section: The cooling method shall be direct expansion coils with mechanical refrigeration. Coils shall have copper tubes with aluminum fins. Capacity shall be as scheduled on the plans. Provide crankcase heaters and safety protection for low suction and overcurrent. Units three tons and larger shall have expansion valves. L. The cooling system shall be rated according to ARI standard 210. System shall be fully charged with refrigerant. Compressors shall be warranted for five (5) years. M. Damper Section: An automatically controlled, multi -position interconnected system for handling outside air, return air and exhaust air shall be included in each unit, with ,.. mixed air thermostat and multi -position motor. N. This system of dampers shall maintain a positive relationship between each element so -' that all dampers move in unison, when required amounts of outside and return air are supplied. An exhaust -relief damper shall be included. '~ 0. All damper linkage for this system shall be adjustable. P. All damper blade bearings shall be made of a permanently lubricated corrosion -proof plastic material. .-� Q. Outside air intakes shall employ rain eliminator louvers. R. Damper blades shall be lined with urethane foam to provide a tight seal and quiet operation. S. Filter Section: Filters shall be factory furnished with each unit. Filter media shall be �. 1 " thick fiberglass or polyurethane. Outside and return air shall be separately filtered. Separate filters may be factory supplied or field fabricated. Each unit shall have a separately filtered minimum fresh air intake complete with hood and screen. Filter face velocity shall not exceed 400 FPM. T. Blowers: Each unit shall be equipped with forward curved blower wheels. Units up thru 5 tons cooling capacity shall have direct driven blowers with PSC multi -speed P motors, or belt driven blowers. Units with over 5 tons cooling capacity shall have belt driven blowers. The belt tension shall be easily adjustable. U. Vibration Isolation: The refrigeration compressors and the indoor fan system shall have rotating parts spring isolated from the unit cabinet to minimize transmission of vibration. Fan motors 1 /2 HP and under shall be resiliently mounted. The condenser fan motors and the combustion air fan motors shall be resiliently mounted. V. Temperature Controls: Temperature controls shall be furnished as standard by the unit 41"' manufacturer. Thermostats shall be automatic changeover type equal to Minneapolis 99075R EQUIPMENT 15700 - 3 ,., 06/02 Honeywell T874/0674D non -switching subbase (wired for automatic change -over, and auto fan, see below), and # TG504 thermostat guard. The control power circuit for each new unit shall originate in a central time clock to control all the units from a single point. The time clock shall be Tork #DG180 digital, with battery back-up, and skip -a -day feature. The control circuit shall be on a hand -off -auto switch with the time clock in the auto branch. In addition, furnish an appropriately labeled "dust switch" mounted on a stainless steel coverplate to override the economizer controls and close the outside air damper. W. Condensate Pan: Furnish and install a full size schedule 40 vented PVC trap from the condensate drain pan from each unit. The trap shall spill into a 24"X24"X3" deep 18 gauge galvanized iron pan set in plastic cement on the roof. X. Thermostat Relocation: The contractor shall relocate thermostats serving existing units to remain where walls are removed. Verify existing locations of all thermostats and relocate as required. END OF SECTION 99075R EQUIPMENT 15700 - 4 06/02 r" SECTION 15800 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE ir-- A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the testing, balancing and adjusting of various systems and portions thereof to produce proper flows of air and water, correct setting of regulation devices, and other end results as more fully described hereinafter. The Division 15 contractor shall -, provide the service of a certified TAB contractor under the contract. The TAB report shall be AABC or NEBB certified. B. Upon completion of the installation and start up of the mechanical equipment, check, adjust, and balance systemic components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space to the building. C. Prepare and submit to the Architect complete reports on the balance and operation of the system. D. Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after occupancy of the building to insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained throughout and to satisfy any unusual conditions. r-- E. Make inspections in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made and at those times make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the systemic components, to produce the proper conditions in each conditioned space. F. During the balancing, the temperature regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship between controlling instruments and calibrated by the Contractor. The correctness of the final setting shall be proved by taking hourly readings for a period of 4 successive eight hour days in a typical room on each separately controlled zone. The total variation shall not exceed two degrees from the preset median temperature during the entire temperature survey period. G. In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of 2 degrees within each separately controlled zone, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to furnish or revise fan drives and/or motors if necessary, without cost to the Owner, to attain the specified air volumes. H. Before final acceptance is made, furnish the following data: 1. A tabulation of the simultaneous temperature of all spaces on each separately �-- controlled zone, together with the outside temperature at time of measurement. 2. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to the temperature tabulation specified above. 3. Air quantities at each return and exhaust air handling device. r- 4. Flow rate and temperature at each coil and heating device. 5. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply, and exhaust fan, and other components of the system. These readings shall be related to fan curves in terms of CFM handled. 99075R TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15800 - 1 .., 06/02 6. Motor current readings at each fan and pump. The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed. I. The above data shall be neatly entered on appropriate forms together with any typed supplements required to completely document all results. Written explanations of any abnormal conditions shall be included. All this shall be assembled into a suitable brochure and a total of 4 copies shall be provided. J. When opposite season modifications are made, additional data sheets indicating new settings, readings, etc., shall be prepared and submitted in quadruplicate. 1.3 INSTRUCTIONS A. During the test periods instruct the building operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of all equipment. B. Deliver to the Owner 3 complete instruction manuals covering the maintenance and operation of the system components. In addition, provide schematic wiring diagrams of each piece of equipment framed under glass and mounted on the wall as directed. Provide complete data on all equipment, including for each item a parts list, and the name and address of the vendor where replacement parts can be purchased. END OF SECTION 99075R TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15800 - 2 06/02 SECTION 1.6010 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1 .1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. The work shall include furnishing and installing all rigid steel and flexible metallic conduit, electrical metallic tubing, wireways, pull and junction boxes and outlet boxes, together with all supporting devices and other accessories required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUITS r-� A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick -wall; galvanized inside and outside or galvanized outside with a protective coating inside; UL listed and labeled according to Standard UL6; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.1; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy or Allied. B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Steel tubing, galvanized outside and provided with a slick corrosion resistant interior coating; UL listed and labeled according to Standard 797; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.3; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy or Allied. C. Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips (commercial Greenfield); conforming to UL Standard UL I and UL listed and labeled; Triangle Conduit and Cable Company, or equivalent. D. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound, galvanized steel strips, as for flexible metal conduit; with polyvinyl chloride cover extruded over the exterior to make conduit liquidtight; UL listed; Electri-flex type "LA" or equivalent. 2.2 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. Couplings and Terminations for Rigid Steel Conduit: Factory made steel threaded couplings; bushing at all boxes and cabinets, with locknuts inside and outside box or cabinet. B. Couplings and Terminations for Electrical Metallic Tubing: Join lengths of EMT with r-. steel compression couplings. Attach EMT to boxes or cabinets with steel compression -type box connectors having an insulated throat with locknuts. Where grounding bushings are required at terminations, they shall be T & B Series 3802, or equivalent. Set screw type connectors or indent connectors will not be allowed. C. Couplings and Terminations for Flexible Metal Conduit: T & B 440 Series couplings at connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 3110 or 3130 Series nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations. 99075R RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16010 — 1 06/02 D. Couplings and Terminations for Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: T & B 5271 Series adapters at connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 5331 Series nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations. E. Expansion Joints in Conduit: 0-Z Type AX with internal ground and external bonding jumper. 2.3 WIREWAYS A. Interior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; screw covers; complete with all fittings, couplings, hangers and accessories; Square D, General Electric, or equivalent. B. Exterior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; removable front cover which is gasketed; weatherproof rainhood. 2.4 OUTLET BOXES A. UL listed of sizes and types specified. B. Sheet Steel Boxes: Sheet steel not lighter than No. 14 gauge, galvanized after fabrication; Raco, Steel City or Appleton. C. Cast Metal Boxes: Cast iron or cast alloy with threaded hubs; Crouse -Hinds, Appleton _. or Pyle National. 2.5 PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet steel, galvanized inside and outside, with galvanized covers. B. Small Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is not over 100 cubic inches, use standard outlet boxes. C. Larger Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is over 100 cubic inches, use cabinets as specified for panelboard cabinets with covers of same gauge as boxes, secured with corrosion resistant bolts or screws. D. Surface Raceway: As manufactured by Wiremold or Walker/Parkersburg, UL listed and sized as shown on drawings. Furnish surface raceway with all fittings, couplings, hangers and accessories as required for a complete installation. The surface raceway shall be finished in the manufacturer's standard buff finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS A. All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic tubing unless noted or specified otherwise. Conduits may be run exposed in machinery and electrical rooms and unfinished areas. All other conduits shall be run concealed unless otherwise noted. All exposed runs shall be installed parallel to the surface of the building in a neat and orderly manner. B. Types: All conduits installed in wet or damp locations, or on roofs shall be rigid galvanized steel conduits. Above grade interior conduits shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit, intermediate metal conduits or electrical metallic tubing. Conduits installed below grade in slabs or buried in earth shall be PVC or PVC coated rigid galvanized steel or wrapped rigid galvanized steel. C. Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain. Make field bends with approved bending devices. Do not install bends or offsets in which conduit is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured. 99075R RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16010 — 2 06/02 r., r*+ D. Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12" long at final connections to all motors, generators, controls and other devices subject to movement because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. Use flexible metal conduit also at r-- connections to recessed lighting fixtures, and elsewhere as required. In damp or wet locations, and where installed outdoors, use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. E. Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways within 3" of steam and r hot water pipes, breeching and flues, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then keep raceways at least 1 " from insulation on the pipe, breeching or flue crossed. Wherever possible, avoid installing raceways directly above or in close proximity to --� boilers and other like objects operating at high temperatures. F. Damp or Wet Locations: In damp or wet locations make every effort to avoid installing raceways in a manner which will create moisture traps. Where they must be so installed, seal both ends of raceways with an approved sealing compound to prevent "breathing" and moisture condensation within the raceways. G. Different Systems: In systems operating at more than 300 volts between phase conductors, where different phase conductors are to be run to a common gang wall switch box, install a separate conduit for each different phase wire and its return switch leg, and provide substantial barriers between adjacent switches in the box so that two different phase wires will not be the same compartment. H. Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. Ream out all conduit ends after threading. Secure rigid conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, switchboards, support boxes, or sheet metal outlet boxes by galvanized locknuts, inside and outside, with insulating bushing inside. Unthreaded set screw type couplings or connectors are not acceptable in rigid conduit systems. No running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit systems. I. Protection of Raceways: Seal ends of all raceways with blank discs ("pennies"), push +�► pennies or other approved closers during construction. Do not pull any conductors into raceways until all plastering in the vicinity is completed. Swab out all raceways before pulling in conductors. J. Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls partitions, etc., carefully fill any space between the outside of the raceway and the building material to prevent passage of air, water, smoke and fumes. Filling material shall be fire resistive and installed to meet requirements of the UL Fire Resistance Directory. 3.2 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Support Spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical Code, but space hangers more closely where required by conditions. B. Vertical Conduit Risers: Support vertical conduits at each floor by means of riser clamps or U-bolts, clamping them to a steel channel bridging the opening in the floor. C. Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with galvanized malleable iron one hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1 /4" and larger on Kindorf No. 150 or Steel City No. C-149 hangers. Use no perforated strap iron as hanger material. Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above metal lath and plaster ceilings or mechanically suspended dry ceilings of the non -removable type, they may be supported on ceiling runner channels. Where conduits smaller than 1-1 /4" are installed above removable ceilings, attach them to the structure or bar joists (where present) or support them on threaded hanger rods with clips. Do not use any wire to support conduits or to attach conduits to supporting members. Locate conduits a sufficient distance above the ceiling to permit removal of the ceiling panels. Locate them so as not to hinder access to mechanical and electrical equipment through the ceiling panels. 99075R RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16010 — 3 06/02 D. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same elevations, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut angle iron or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Size trapeze members including the suspension rods for the number size and loaded weight of the conduits they are to support. Space them as required for the smallest conduit supported. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES A. Usage: Provide at each outlet or device of whatever character a metal outlet box in which conduits shall terminate. B. Boxes recessed in construction: Sheet steel boxes. C. For Lighting Fixture Outlets: 4" octagonal by 1-1/2" minimum depth with 3/8" fixture stud for incandescent lights which are surface mounted, wall mounted or suspended. D. For Wall Switches, Receptacles and Communications Use: Use 4"x4" size with proper square cornered tile wall cover, plaster cover, or finishing plate, except where construction will not permit or the device requires a larger box. E. Wall Mounted Telephone Outlet Boxes: 4-1 1 /16" square by 2-1 /8" deep, unless otherwise noted or unless wall construction requires a smaller box. F. Boxes for Exposed Work: Cast metal boxes. G. Boxes for Outdoors: Cast metal boxes with gasketed covers. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sizing: Size all pull and junction boxes in accordance with NEC, using larger sizes than required by code where job conditions so indicate. B. Mounting: Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent of conduit systems. On concealed conduit systems where boxes are not otherwise accessible, set box covers flush with finished surfaces for access. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF SURFACE RACEWAYS A. Surface raceway shall be installed parallel to the wall line in a neat and orderly manner. The surface raceway shall be mounted using only such fasteners that are recommended by the manufacturer for the type of surface material encountered. Paint raceway to match surface of installation. END OF SECTION 99075R RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16010 — 4 06/02 SECTION 16101 CONDUCTORS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. The work shall include the furnishing of all conductors, together with all splices, connections, identification, bundling, etc., including pulling devices. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS (600 VOLTS AND UNDER)" r., A. Type: Soft drawn, annealed copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts, continuous without weld, splice or joint, uniform cross-section, free from flaws, scale and other imperfections; Okonite, Triangle, United Copper Industries, Anaconda or Simplex. No. 8 and larger shall be stranded; No. 10 and smaller shall be solid. B. Insulation: Branch circuits shall have type THHN/THWN, THW, or RHW insulation unless the type is specifically designated or specified. Service feeders shall be type THHN/THWN or THW. Feeder circuits shall be Type THW. or THHN/THWN C. Circuits Subjected to High Temperatures: Type RHH conductors for wiring in proximity to boilers, and for motors and devices subject to high temperature because of high ambient temperature or convection or radiant heat. w D. Lighting Fixture Conductors: Type and size approved by the NEC for the purpose. 2.2 JOINTS AND SPLICES A. Stranded Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors or Thomas and Betts Series 54000 compression connectors. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. All compression connectors shall be applied with properly sized dies and tools. Split -bolt connectors are not acceptable. B. Solid Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors; or UL approved electrical spring connectors of "Scotchlok", Ideal or T & B "Piggy" make. All .r. connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. Split bolt connectors are not acceptable. 2.3 COLOR CODING A. Phase conductors shall be black, red and blue for phases, A, B, and C respectively in the 208 volt system. Neutral conductor shall be white and grounding conductor shall be green. 99075R CONDUCTORS 16101 - 1 06/02 EZ PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 WIRE PULLING A. Wire Pulling: Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling conductors into raceways or conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable material to pull in conductors. Attach pulling lines to conductors by means of woven basket grips or by pulling eyes attached directly to conductors. All conductors to be installed in a single conduit shall be pulled in together. Pull no conductors into conduits until all work of a nature which may cause injury to conductors is completed. Use an Underwriters' listed cable pulling compound where necessary. B. Cable Lubricants: All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, and shall be certified by their manufacturer to be non -injurious to the insulation on which they are used. C. Pulling Devices in Empty Raceways: Provide in every empty raceway, not containing conductors to be installed by this Contractor, a suitable pull line to facilitate future installation of wiring. Lines shall be free from splices and shall have ample exposed length at each end. Identify each end of each line with a linen tag bearing complete information as to the purpose of the raceway and the location of its other end. All lines shall be nylon or polyethylene cord with a tensile strength not less than 200 pounds. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRE (600 VOLTS AND UNDER) A. Feeders: Run all feeders their entire length in continuous pieces without joints or splices, insofar as practicable. Make joints in branch circuits only where circuits divide as shown on drawings. Such joints shall consist of one through circuit to which shall be spliced the tap circuit. B. Branch Circuits: Not more than one power or lighting circuit shall be installed in a single conduit, except that one 3-wire circuit or one 4-wire circuit consisting of 2 different phase wires and a common neutral or 3 different phase wires and a common neutral may be installed in a single conduit. This provision shall not prohibit the installation in a single conduit of all conductors of a circuit with three- and four-way — switching. C. Sizes: No wire shall be smaller than No. 12 except for signal or control circuits, and except for individual lighting fixture taps as permitted by the National Electrical Code. D. Receptacle and Motor Branch Circuits: No. 12 conductors unless noted or scheduled otherwise. E. Home runs on 120 volt, 20 ampere Lighting Branch Circuits: Where length of run from panelboard to first lighting outlet exceeds 75 feet use No. 10 conductors; otherwise use No. 12 conductors. F. Joints and Splices: Make joints and splices only where necessary and only at outlet boxes and pull boxes. All joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure. After a �- joint or splice is complete, insulate it with Okonite rubber tape, and Manson friction tape to make the insulation of the joint or splice equal to that of the conductor. In lieu of this, 3M Company's "Scotch" No. 33 vinyl plastic tape may be used if applied in at least four layers (half lapped in two directions), with all larger splices, terminals, sharp corners and voids being first protected by application of "Scotchfil" insulating putty. G. Conductor splices in wet locations shall be made in accordance with the conductor manufacturer's recommendations. H. Identifying Tags: Non-ferrous; stamped to clearly identify each circuit. Securely fasten tags to all cables, feeders and power circuits in pull boxes, lighting, power and distribution panelboards, etc. 99075R CONDUCTORS 16101 - 2 06/02 r I. Bundling Conductors: Bundle all conductors in panelboards, cabinets and the like, using marlin twine lacing or nylon straps made for the purpose. Bundle conductors larger than No. 10 in individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors in larger groups. J. Cable Supports and Boxes: Install cable supports and boxes for all vertical conductors in accordance with National Electrical Code requirements. Boxes shall be of heavy galvanized steel plate construction, not less than No. 10 USS gauge, riveted to an angle iron frame. Removable box covers shall be secured with corrosion -resistant $ screws. For cables without a metallic sheath, cable supports shall be of the split wedge type which clamps each conductor firmly and tightens due to the weight of .,, cable. For cables with metallic sheath, a basket weave or equal type of support shall be provided as approved by the cable manufacturer. END OF SECTION t^" 99075R CONDUCTORS 16101 - 3 06/02 EGO SECTION 16211 WIRING DEVICES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install in suitable outlet boxes, the wiring devices indicated, complete with lamps, coverplates, etc. All shall be properly connected to conductors so as to be operable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRING DEVICES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: The catalog numbers listed herein are generally of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices of Arrow -Hart, Bryant, Pass, Seymour and Leviton or General Electric are also acceptable. B. Classification: Where such a classification is available, all wiring devices shall be "Hospital -Grade" in clinic and exam spaces, and other spaces shall be specification grade. Devices for which the "Hospital Grade" is not available shall be "Specification Grade". All wiring devices shall be "Specification Grade", and shall be UL listed. C. Colors: All devices shall have an ivory finish where mounted in walls finished in light colors and a brown finish where mounted in walls finished in dark colors. 2.2 WALL SWITCHES A. For loads not exceeding 1500 watts at 120 volts or 3000 watts at 277 volts: DEVICE HUBBELL CATALOG NO. Single pole wall switch 1201 or 1201-1 Three-way wall switch 1203 or 1203-1 Four-way wall switch 1204 or 1204-1 Pilot -lighted switch 1201-PLC Momentary Contact switch 1556 or 1556-1 99075R WIRING DEVICES 06/02 16211 - 1 I" B. For loads exceeding above listing: DEVICE Single pole wall switch Three-way wall switch Four-way wall switch Pilot -lighted switch 2.3 RECEPTACLES HUBBELL CATALOG NO. 1221 or 1221-1 1223 or 1223-1 1224 of 1224-1 1221-PLC A. Receptacle, 20 Ampere, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire Grounding Duplex: Hubbell No. 5362 or 5362-1 (NEMA 5-20R). B. Receptacle, 20 Ampere, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire Grounding Duplex with Self -Contained Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter: Hubbell No. GF-5362. 2.4 OTHER DEVICES A. Weatherproof Devices: Provide the specified device in FS box with a gasketed cast aluminum or cast alloy coverplate having a lift cover. 2.5 COVERPLATES A. Provide coverplates for all wiring devices, telephone, signal outlets and other kindred devices. B. For Flush Mounted Devices: Sierra Electric Corporation "S-Line" 0.040" stamped satin stainless steel except in unfinished or machinery spaces, where plates shall be Sierra "P-Line" smooth plastic to match devices. C. For Surface Mounted Devices: Zinc -coated sheet metal with rounded or beveled edges, of same size as boxes, for indoor use; cast alloy plates with gaskets for outdoor use. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION A. At each wiring device, install a label on the inside of the coverplate which shall identify the panel and circuit number to which the device is finally connected. The labels shall be made on the job with indent type Dynamo adhesive tape. Attach the label to the plate with contact cement or other suitable adhesive material. In lieu of a label, the panel and circuit number may be marked on the inside of the coverplate with an indelible pencil. 3.2 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. Where mounting heights are indicated on the drawings, the device shall be installed with the centerline of the device at the indicated height. B. In general, devices which are shown to be installed at counters or other millwork shall be installed above the counter or millwork, unless noted. Wall switches shall be installed on the strike side of the door as finally hung. C. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, or directed by the Architect, install devices at the following heights. 99075R WIRING DEVICES 16211 -2 06/02 DEVICE MOUNTING HEIGHT Wall Switch 4'0" Receptacle 181, Telephone Outlet 181, Wall Dimmer Switch 4'0" END OF SECTION ems+ I!'�M 99075R WIRING DEVICES 16211 - 3 06/02 SECTION 16411 .GROUNDING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all products. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install the various grounding systems outlined herein in accordance with the National Electrical Code. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Products for grounding systems are specified elsewhere herein. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SERVICE AND EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Ensure adequate and permanent service neutral and equipment grounding in accordance with the National Electrical Code, and subject to the following additional n requirements. B. Connect the service ground and equipment ground to a common point within the metallic enclosure containing the main service disconnecting means. From the common point of connection of the service ground and equipment ground, run in conduit a combined service and equipment grounding conductor without joint or splice to the main water service pipe and connect it thereto with an approved bolted pressure clamp. Clean all contact surfaces thoroughly before connection, to assure good metal to metal contact. Where a dielectric fitting occurs on water main, connect the grounding conductor to the street side of the fitting. Bond the conduit to the grounding conductor at each end. Provide and install with ground clamps a No. 3/0 �.. copper jumper conductor around the water meter. Supplement the water pipe ground with an additional electrode which shall be 10' long by 3/4 inch diameter copperclad steel ground rod. Attach the electrode to the water pipe and to the service/equipment grounding conductor. ' C. Size grounding conductors in accordance with National Electrical Code Tables 250-94 and 250-95. D. The building structural steel frame shall be grounded to the building service grounding -! electrode, using the conductor size specified in National Electrical Code Section 250-94(a). 99075R GROUNDING 16411 - 1 06/02 3.2 GROUNDING RACEWAYS A. Assure the electrical continuity of all metallic raceway systems, pulling up all conduits and/or locknuts wrench tight. Where expansion joints or telescoping joints occur, provide bonding jumpers. Where flexible metallic conduit is employed, provide a green -insulated grounding jumper installed in the flexible conduit. Install a separate green -insulated conductor in each non-metallic conduit. B. Provide grounding bushings on all service and feeder raceways terminating within switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, cabinets, and all other enclosures. Provide grounding conductors from such bushings to the frame of the enclosure and to the ground bus or equipment grounding strap. Size grounding conductors in accordance with NEC Table 250-95. 3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Provide a separate, green -insulated copper grounding conductor, with insulation of the same rating as phase conductors, for each feeder and for each branch circuit indicated. Install the grounding conductor in the same raceway with the related phase and neutral conductors, and connect the grounding conductor to pull boxes or outlet boxes at intervals of 100 feet or less. Where paralleled conductors in separate raceways occur, provide a grounding conductor in each raceway. Connect all grounding conductors to bare grounding bars in panelboards, and to ground buses in service equipment to the end that there will be an uninterrupted grounding circuit from the point of a ground fault back to the point of connection of the equipment ground and system neutral. Size all of these grounding conductors per NEC Table 250-95. END OF SECTION 99075R GROUNDING 16411 - 2 06/02 SECTION 16510 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Requirements. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide complete catalog data and drawings on all items of equipment. t' 1.3 MANUALS A. Include all submittal data in the operation and maintenance manuals. 1.4 SCOPE A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system. ..,. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELBOARDS A. Panelboard Cabinets: Furnish and install cabinets to serve the various panelboards, of sizes as required to house the panelboards. B. Cabinet Construction: Rigidly constructed of sheet steel of gauges conforming to Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. requirements; corners overlapped or welded; edges turned over to receive trim. C. Cabinet Fronts: Cut from single sheet of not less than No. 12 gauge cold rolled sheet steel; fastened in place by adjustable trim clamps which will allow plumbing; same size as the cabinet box if surface mounted; size to overlap the box a minimum of 3/4" on all sides if flush mounted. Provide each door with a substantial flush, cylinder tumbler lock and catch. On doors more than 48" high provide a combination three point catch and lock with T-handle. Provide each lock with two keys, with all locks keyed alike. D. Finish: All back boxes galvanized; all exposed metal, including fronts, primed and finished in gray lacquer. 2.2 PANELBOARDS, GENERALLY A. Mount all panelboards in cabinets as specified hereinbefore, arranged for flush or surface mounting as indicated on drawings. B. Where a circuit protective device is scheduled as a "spare", provide the device complete for operation. Where such a device is scheduled as a "space" or "space �^ only", provide proper space and all necessary connectors for future installation of the size of device scheduled. Where a breaker or switch is scheduled to serve a "future" load, provide the device complete for operation. P^! r 99075R ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION 16510 - 1 06/02 C. All circuit breakers shall be quick make, quick break, trip free, thermal magnetic, indicating type unless noted otherwise. Provide all multiple pole breakers with common trip and single operating handle; handle ties between breakers are unacceptable. Branch circuit breakers shall be fully interchangeable without disturbing adjacent units. D. Connect all circuit interrupting devices with sequence phasing. E. Where a feeder serves more than one panel, first entering one panel and then proceeding thru a side gutter to other panels, install the feeder full size in a continuous piece without joint or splice through the side gutter of the panels to serve the succeeding panels. Make the gutters on that side and on the top at least 4" greater than normal (more if necessary) to accommodate the wiring and make the tap from the feeder to the panels with suitable bolted pressure T-cable tap connectors. Under no circumstances use feed -through lugs on a panel bus with the current drawn by a panel being carried through the buses of the preceding panel. F. Provide each panelboard with a neatly typewritten directory of circuits mounted in a cardholder on the inside of the panelboard cabinet. Cover directory with transparent sheet plastic. G. All panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. and the building main panel shall be listed as suitable for "Service Entrance Equipment." H. Submit shop drawings of each panelboard for review before commencing fabrication; drawings shall indicate number, size, interrupting rating and type of circuit protective devices; dimensions, gauges and type of construction of cabinets, size and material of main bus and lugs, and any other pertinent information necessary to determine compliance with the drawings and specifications. I. Provide each panelboard with a factory engraved nameplate which shall identify the panelboard name. 2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS A. Panelboards shall have the number and size of bolted -in circuit breakers as scheduled. Panels shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or ITE manufacture, equivalent to the General Electric panels listed below. B. Where a lighting and appliance panelboard contains more than 42 branch overcurrent devices, the assembly shall consist of two or more separate boxes bolted together and covered by a common multiple door front; each box containing not more than 42 branch overcurrent devices. C. Panelboards for 208 or 240 volt Service: General Electric Type AQ, with type THQB circuit breakers. 2.4 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Unless otherwise noted or required, all disconnect switches shall be UL listed and shall meet NEMA Standard KSI for Type HD heavy-duty switches. Switches shall be unfused unless noted otherwise; quick make, quick break; in NEMA 3R enclosures if exposed to the weather; elsewhere in NEMA I general purpose enclosures unless special enclosures are required. All motor circuit switches shall be horsepower rated. B. Switches shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or ITE manufacture, equivalent to General Electric Type TH quick make, quick break switches. C. Where space does not permit use of the above specified switches, such as within weatherproof fan housings, etc., use suitable horsepower rated tumbler switches as unfused disconnects; General Electric Type RB or equivalent. D. Where disconnect switches are used to disconnect starters, provide auxiliary poles in switches as required to disconnect all auxiliary control circuits in starters. 99075R ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION 16510 - 2 06/02 2.5 FUSES A. Furnish and install all fuses necessary for leaving the installation complete and in working order, including a complete set of fuses in each spare switch. B. Upon completion of the work provide a standard carton (but not less than 3 fuses where a carton does not contain as many as 3) of each size of each type of fuse used. These spare fuses are in addition to fuses in spare switches and replacement fuses blown during construction and testing. C. Place a fuse identification label, showing type and size of the required fuses, inside the door of each enclosure requiring fuses. D. Fuses shall conform to the latest NEMA Standards, and shall be UL listed and labeled (except as noted otherwise) They shall conform to the UL classes listed hereinafter. Voltage ratings shall be suitable for the systems to which the fuses are applied. E. Fuses shall be shipped to the job in boxes, and shall not be installed in any equipment until the installation is complete, and final tests have been made prior to energizing the equipment. F. Where the spacing of fuse clips in equipment is greater than required by the proper size of fuse, use suitable fuse reducers to fit the fuses. G. Fuses shall be of the classes and types listed below, the type designations referring to those indicated on the plans. 1 . Type LP: Class RK-1; Bussman Type LPN or LPS "Low Peak". Fuses shall be available in ratings 0-600 amperes, shall be current limiting dual element with tie delay, and shall have interrupting rating of 200,00 RMS symmetrical amperes. Fuses shall be equipped with slotted blades, and switch fuse clips shall be provided with matching NEC fuse rejection feature. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Bussman, Littelfuse. END OF SECTION 99075R 06/02 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION 16510 - 3 SECTION 16610 LIGHTING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review catalog data and drawings on all equipment items. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section pertains to all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the complete lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Provide and install a lighting fixture on each and every lighting outlet shown. Furnish fixtures in accordance with the designations on the drawings and as specified herein. Should any designations be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixtures of the same type as used in rooms of similar usage. All features specified or scheduled for fixtures shall be provided, even if the catalog number given in the specifications or schedule lacks the required numerals, prefixes or suffixes corresponding to the features called for. B. Fixtures: All lighting fixtures shall bear the label of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Furnish scale drawings, catalog data, samples of finish, distribution curves, and any other data required by the Architect for every type fixture. C. Standard Ballasts: Provide all fluorescent fixtures with high power factor electronic ballast as scheduled. UL and ETL labeled. D. Lenses: Wherever acrylic lenses are specified or noted, the material used shall be virgin acrylic with a minimum thickness of 0.125 inches. E. Lamps: Fully equip each fixture with a full set of new lamps at the completion and acceptance of the work; lamps shall be of the best grade, and of the sizes and types specified; General Electric, Westinghouse or Sylvania. F. Incandescent Lamps: Inside frosted unless specified or recommended otherwise by the fixture manufacturer. G. Fluorescent Lamps: GE-SPX-4100°K. 99075R LIGHTING 16610 - 1 06/02 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR FIXTURES v. A. Outlet box locations shown for fluorescent fixtures are diagrammatic. Locate boxes to coincide with stem hangers where such occur. Fixtures shall be level, square with the general construction and securely attached. B. Lay -in Type Fixtures: Refer to the ceiling installer's layout for exact location. Center the fixtures in ceiling grids. Wire the fixtures using concealed outlet boxes accessible through ceiling panels. Install conductors in flexible metallic conduit from box to fixture. C. Fixtures in Plaster Ceilings: Provide a suitable plaster ring or frame for each fixture recessed in a plaster ceiling. D. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Fixtures shall be installed flush with the ceilings. Where fixtures are mounted to an exposed grid ceiling, the fixtures may be clipped to the ceiling grid provided the attachment holds the fixture flush, level, and secure. Where they cannot be centered on a grid, install a structural member to span two tees and T attach the fixture to the structural members. E. Where fixtures are installed in a continuous row, the row shall be straight and plumb. Lens shall be aligned in all planes and no part of the lamp shall be visible. _ F. Reused Fixtures: Where existing lighting fixtures are to be relocated, carefully remove and restore the fixture. When it is ready to be hung, thoroughly wash all dirt and dust from the fixture and lens, hang the fixture and install new lamps. Should any such fixtures be damaged in this process replace them with matching new ones at no cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 99075R LIGHTING 16610 - 2 06/02 SECTION 16701 MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING PART 1 GENERAL 1 .1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, the Special Conditions and the General Requirements. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data and drawings on all equipment items. 1.3 SCOPE A. This Section of the Specifications pertains to all other labor, material, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to motor and equipment wiring and control as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS A. All motors will, unless otherwise noted, be furnished under other Divisions of the specifications, or will be furnished by the Owner. Where motors are mounted integrally with items of equipment, they will be erected in place with such equipment ready for electrical connection; such erection is not a part of the work under this Division. Where motors are to be installed as separate items, their foundations, anchor bolts and other provisions necessary to their erection will be provided as a part of the work of the Division under which they are furnished; their erection and final setting are a part of the work of this Division, and shall be done by specially skilled millwrights or similar craftsmen. 2.2 MOTOR STARTERS A. All motor starters (controllers) will, unless otherwise noted, be furnished under other divisions of the specifications, or will be furnished by the Owner. B. Install under this Division, including supporting structures, all motor starters and control equipment which are not shipped integrally mounted with the controlled equipment. Provide and install all wiring of every character, for both power and control, except that which is factory installed and shipped as an integral part of assembled equipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT WIRING A. Connect complete for operation all items of heating, air conditioning, plumbing, kitchen, laundry and laboratory equipment, and all other electrical devices furnished by 99075R MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING 16701 - 1 06/02 the Owner or under other Divisions of the specifications. Outlets of various types have been indicated at equipment locations, but no indications of exact location or scope of the work are shown on the drawings. Refer to the Owner and to the various Contractors for the work under the other Divisions for the scope of connections to equipment furnished by them and for the exact locations of all items. Request of the Owner and the aforementioned suppliers and contractors all rough -in drawings required for proper installation of the electrical work, in ample time to permit preparation of the drawings and thus avoid delays on the job. B. Where disconnect switches or circuit breakers are not provided integral with control equipment for motors and other electrical appurtenances, provide and install all _- disconnect switches required by the National Electrical Code and/or indicated. 3.2 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT A. Do not rough -in conduits or wiring for kitchen equipment until exact equipment locations have been laid out and approved by the Owner. After approval, provide conduit stub -ups and equipment connections at the exact locations shown on the drawings. 3.3 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS A. Completely connect for operation all items for temperature controls which require electrical connections, furnishing all wiring, conduit and labor. END OF SECTION 99075R MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING 16701 - 2 06102 N SECTION 16810 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. The installing contractor and/or equipment manufacturer shall provide complete and detailed shop drawings and include: 1. Point to point wiring diagram showing terminal connections to all system devices. This would include the size of conductors to each device and proposed routing. After review, this shall become the installation drawing. 2. Floor plan drawings locating all devices associated with the Fire Alarm System. 3. Factory data sheets on each piece of equipment to be used and so marked as to dimensions, size, voltage, style, catalog number, manufacturer's names, and configuration. This shall include battery and power supply calculations. 4. Detailed system description and operation describing system functions. 5. Complete Bill of Material for reference. 6. One copy of the installation, operation and maintenance manuals for fire alarm equipment for the submittal review. B. All submittal data shall be in bound form with contractor's name, supplier's name, project name, and state fire alarm license number adequately identified. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. The installing contractor shall be the authorized representative of the fire alarm manufacturer to sell, install and service the manufacturer's equipment. B. The installing contractor must be licensed by the state Fire Marshall to sell, install and service fire alarm systems. C. The installing contractor shall have on their staff an installation superintendent who is - licensed by the State Fire Marshall's office for such purpose and under whose supervision installation shall take place. D. The fire alarm installation firm will have factory trained personnel performing the control panel wiring for the system that they were trained for. The firm shall also maintain a stock of parts and components Used in the system. E. The qualifications of the installation firm, the availability of replacement parts and service records will be considered. 1.4 MANUALS ^ A. Provide three sets of operation and maintenance manuals which includes: 1. Complete typewritten operating instructions. 2. Wiring diagrams for the control panel with all terminals identified. 3. A parts list for the system identifying the components with ordering numbers. 4. A new framed floor plan showing the initiating devices and fire alarm zones. 5. A plan showing conduit size, number and size of conductors and locations of all devices. 99075R FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16810 - 1 06/02 1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The installation and testing shall be made under the provisions of the latest National Electrical Code (NFPA-70); NFPA 101 (Life Safety Code). NFPA 72, UL Standards (1480, 864, 268, 268A, 217, 521, 228, 464, 1638, 38, 346, 50, 1791, 1481), and all other applicable state and local codes and ordinances. The Contractor shall submit the new fire alarm equipment layout to the local fire alarm authority having jurisdiction for approval. 1.6 SCOPE A. The Contractor shall furnish and install and modify the closed circuit, electrically supervised, zone annunciated fire alarm and detection system as specified herein and indicated on the drawings. It is the intent to obtain a complete system which shall operate as described herein, and all equipment necessary for such operation shall be provided whether or not each item is enumerated herein or described on the drawings. The system shall include, but not be limited to, all control panels, power supplies, signal initiating devices, audible and visual alarm devices, conduit, wire, fittings and all other accessories required to provide a complete and operable system. The system shall operate as a non -coded, continuous sounding system which shall have multiple audible alarm circuits as specified and indicated on the drawings. The system initiating circuits shall be wired as Style B (Class B) supervised circuits. The system alarm indicating circuits shall be wired as Style Y (Class B) supervised circuits. 1.7 QUALITY A. To establish the minimum standards of performance, function, quality, and features of system desired, the equipment specified is that of the Notifier Company. Equivalent equipment (compatible UL listed) from other manufacturers may be substituted for the specified equipment. B. All equipment, materials, accessories, devices, and other facilities covered by this specification or noted on contract drawings and installation specifications shall be of the best suited for the intended use and shall be provided by a single manufacturer or, if provided by different manufacturers, recognized as compatible by both manufacturers. C. All equipment and material shall be new and unused, unless directed otherwise. D. Wiring: All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code, local codes and the National Fire Protection Association-70, Article 760. The minimum wire sizes shall be 12 gauge for AC power supply connections and auxiliary circuits, 14 gauge for DC power supply connections, 14 gauge for audible alarm circuits and 18 gauge for conventional initiating devices (manual stations, heat detectors, smoke detectors, etc.). E. Wire shall be UL listed for limited energy (300V) and fire alarm applications and shall be installed in conduit. All wiring between floors, in mechanical rooms, or in risers shall be installed in conduit with a minimum size of 3/4". F. All field wiring shall be completely supervised. 1.8 TESTING, GUARANTEE, SERVICE A. A factory trained technical representative of the manufacturer shall perform the final connections, complete system checkout and testing of the system, and it shall be subject to the final acceptance and approval of the engineer and local authorities. Upon completion and acceptance, the owner and/or his representative(s) shall be instructed in the proper use of the system. A written copy of the final system test and checkout 99075R FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16810 - 2 06%02 shall be provided detailing the function of each device. Furnish the Owner, Architect, Engineer and all authorities having jurisdiction a Certificate of Compliance. B. All equipment and wiring shall be free from defects in workmanship and materials, under normal use and service, for a period of one year from owner acceptance or beneficial occupancy, whichever comes first. Any equipment shown to be defective shall be replaced, repaired, or adjusted free of charge. C. The manufacturer shall be represented by a local service organization and the name of such supplied to the Owner and Engineer. D. The manufacturer's representative shall be prepared to offer a service contract at the end of the warranty period. 1.9 COORDINATION A. It shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate all requirements surrounding installation of the Fire Alarm System with all trades including, but, not exclusive of: electrical contractor, elevator contractor and HVAC controls contractor. ,,. Adequate coordination shall be provided to insure proper installation and interface to all peripheral items required to interact with the Fire Alarm System to provide a complete and functional system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM A. The existing Fire Alarm and Detection System shall remain and be a single integrated system by a single manufacturer. The Contractor shall assume sole responsibility for its operation. The fire detection portion of the system contain all power supplies, relays, modules and batteries as required for the operation described herein. The equipment described herein is generally of Notifier manufacture. All components of the system shall be fully supervised. 2.2 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION A. Operation of manual or automatic initiating device shall cause the following events to occur: 1. The System Alarm LED on the CPU Module shall flash. '^ 2. A local sounding device in the panel shall be activated. 3. All automatic programs assigned to the alarm point shall be executed and the associated indicating devices and relays activated. As each indicating circuit or control relay is activated, its LED shall be illuminated. 4. The appropriate zone alarm indication shall appear on the fire control panel and at the remote annunciator panel. 5. An evacuation tone shall sound on all alarm horns and all visual strobes and exit signs shall flash. 6. RTU over 2000-cfm shall shut down if a zone goes into alarm that serves that space. 7. Remote Point Annunciation devices shall show an alarm condition if devices connected to it are in alarm condition. 8. The Remote Signaling or Municipal Tie connection shall be activated. B. When a trouble condition is detected by one of the system initiating circuits or notification circuits, the following functions shall immediately occur: 1. The System Trouble LED shall flash. 2. A local sounding device in the panel shall be activated. 99075R FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16810 - 3 06/02 r-• 3. The trouble LED for the corresponding initiating or indicating circuit shall flash on its respective module. If the trouble condition is caused by MODULE FAILURE, POWER TROUBLE, or GROUND FAULT, the corresponding LED on the CPU shall flash. 2.3 CONTROL PANEL A. The control panel is a Notifier 4800 and shall remain. 2.4 CORRIDOR/ROOM SMOKE DETECTORS A. The Contractor shall furnish and install 4 wire Notifier photoelectric smoke detectors model 2451 with base. 2.5 MANUAL PULL STATIONS A. Manual Fire Alarm Stations shall be of the nonbreakglass type, providing noncoded signals and operating with a double action motion. Upon actuation, they shall not be restorable to normal except by use of a key match existing. Manual Fire Alarm Stations shall match existing. 2.6 AIR HANDLING UNIT SHUTDOWN RELAY & EXIT SIGN RELAY A. Air Handling Unit Shutdown Relays shall be installed in each air handling unit's starter as designated on the drawings. Relays shall be de -energized to shut down AHU equipment from the fire detection control system. Operating voltage shall be 24 volt D.C. Cabinet construction shall be die formed cold rolled 16 gauge steel with screw -type cover. Finish shall be gray baked enamel. Three 1 /2 inch conduit knockouts shall be provided in the cabinet. Relay contacts shall be SPDT rated 8 amps inductive load 120 volt A.C. 60 cycle, 5/16 inch diameter fine silver. Relay coil shall be wound on a molded phenolic bobbin and centrifugally impregnated with high quality varnish. Breakdown shall be a minimum 1500 volt RMS between all elements. Terminals shall be No. 8 heavy duty screw type. The air handling unit shutdown relay shall be a Notifier Model C-215D, or equal, and shall be Underwriters Laboratories Inc. listed. 2.7 AUDIBLE AND VISUAL INDICATING DEVICES A. The alarm indicating devices shall be UL listed strobe/horn with synchronized temporal pattern ANSI S3.41 and synchronized strobes housed in common frame and finished in red. The alarm signals shall be Wheelock #AS-24MCW-FR flush mounted unit or equal with DSM-12/24-R-SYNC module. B. The strobe unit shall be a Wheelock #RSS-24MCW-FR synchronized module. 2.8 REMOTE POWER SUPPLY A. Remote power supply shall be a Wheelock PS12/24-6 with batteries and sync unit or equal. 99075R FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16810 - 4 06/02 P" PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The installation of the system shall be made by the Contractor under the supervision of a representative of the manufacturer who shall make the final connection to the system, perform the functional tests of the system and place it in operation. B. Installation shall be in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Consult manufacturer for all wiring diagrams, schematics, sizes, outlets, etc. before installing conduits and pulling wires. C. Fire alarm devices shall be mounted upon and all splices made in Listed Boxes. Wiring splices are to be avoided to the extent possible and Transposing or changing colors will not be permitted". D. Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20 amperes as shown. Circuit shall be labeled as "FIRE ALARM". E. As indicated on the drawings, each zone shall be labeled on the Fire Alarm Control Panel and remote annunciator panel. Names of the zones shall be coordinated with the Owner, and shall meet with the Owner's approval. Provide a framed 8"x10" floor plan for each floor showing room names and all fire alarm equipment. F. Fire alarm cable shall be held in place at the device box, by means of a two -screw connector, (do not use squeeze or crimp type connectors). Staple or strap the cable to the framing members as per NEC or at 4.5 feet maximum spacing. G. Cable must be separated, minimum two (2) inches, from any open conductors of light, power, or class 1 circuits, and shall not be placed in any outlet box or raceway containing these conductors, as per NEC Article 760-29. H. Cable for initiating devices (manual stations, heat detectors, smoke detectors, etc.) shall be looped by zone. Cable shall be installed from the Control Panel to the first device, then to each succeeding device within each zone loop. All manual fire alarm stations shall be connected ahead of all other devices. An end -of -line resistor device shall be installed at or after the last device on the circuit. I. Cable for indicating devices (audible or visual) shall be looped as stated above from the Control Panel. An end -of -line resistor device shall be installed at or after the last device on the circuit. J. All exposed cable below 84 inches, or other locations where the cable can be damaged, must be protected with conduit or a surface raceway. K. Use only identified conduit entries at Fire Alarm Panel or request approval for other penetrations in cabinets (certain areas require clear space for interior components). Cabinet shall be grounded to a cold water pipe. L. Heat and Smoke Detectors: The location of detectors shown on the plans is schematic only. The detector must be located according to code requirements. M. Smoke detectors should be installed to favor the air flow towards return openings and not located where air supply diffusers can dilute smoke before it reaches the detector. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. All fire alarm circuits shall be identified at all terminal and junction boxes. In addition all pull and junction boxes with no fire alarm devices secured to it shall have its cover painted read and "Fire Alarm" stenciled on it in 1 " high black letters. 3.3 MOUNTED HEIGHTS A. Unless noted on the Drawings, or directed by the Engineer, install devices at the following heights. r, 99075R FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16810 - 5 06/02 DEVICE MOUNTING HEIGHTS Manual Pull Station 4'-0" AFF Wall Mounted Horn/Strobe Unit 80" AFF Fire Alarm Remote Power Supply 60" AFF to center 3.4 FINAL INSPECTION A. After the system has been placed in service and all items are functioning properly, call for a final inspection. The manufacturer's representative shall be present and shall demonstrate the operation of the system to the satisfaction of the Owner. 3.5 INSTRUCTION A. The representative of the manufacturer shall allot eight (8) hours to instruct the Owner's personnel as to the complete operation of the system. END OF SECTION 99075R FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16810 6 06/02